2 \# Source code to NASM documentation
4 \M{category}{Programming}
5 \M{title}{NASM - The Netwide Assembler}
7 \M{author}{The NASM Development Team}
8 \M{copyright_tail}{-- All Rights Reserved}
9 \M{license}{This document is redistributable under the license given in the file "COPYING" distributed in the NASM archive.}
10 \M{auxinfo}{This release is dedicated to the memory of Charles A. Crayne. We miss you, Chuck.}
11 \M{summary}{This file documents NASM, the Netwide Assembler: an assembler targetting the Intel x86 series of processors, with portable source.}
14 \M{infotitle}{The Netwide Assembler for x86}
15 \M{epslogo}{nasmlogo.eps}
21 \IR{-MD} \c{-MD} option
22 \IR{-MF} \c{-MF} option
23 \IR{-MG} \c{-MG} option
24 \IR{-MP} \c{-MP} option
25 \IR{-MQ} \c{-MQ} option
26 \IR{-MT} \c{-MT} option
47 \IR{!=} \c{!=} operator
48 \IR{$, here} \c{$}, Here token
49 \IR{$, prefix} \c{$}, prefix
52 \IR{%%} \c{%%} operator
53 \IR{%+1} \c{%+1} and \c{%-1} syntax
55 \IR{%0} \c{%0} parameter count
57 \IR{&&} \c{&&} operator
59 \IR{..@} \c{..@} symbol prefix
61 \IR{//} \c{//} operator
63 \IR{<<} \c{<<} operator
64 \IR{<=} \c{<=} operator
65 \IR{<>} \c{<>} operator
67 \IR{==} \c{==} operator
69 \IR{>=} \c{>=} operator
70 \IR{>>} \c{>>} operator
71 \IR{?} \c{?} MASM syntax
73 \IR{^^} \c{^^} operator
75 \IR{||} \c{||} operator
77 \IR{%$} \c{%$} and \c{%$$} prefixes
79 \IR{+ opaddition} \c{+} operator, binary
80 \IR{+ opunary} \c{+} operator, unary
81 \IR{+ modifier} \c{+} modifier
82 \IR{- opsubtraction} \c{-} operator, binary
83 \IR{- opunary} \c{-} operator, unary
84 \IR{! opunary} \c{!} operator, unary
85 \IR{alignment, in bin sections} alignment, in \c{bin} sections
86 \IR{alignment, in elf sections} alignment, in \c{elf} sections
87 \IR{alignment, in win32 sections} alignment, in \c{win32} sections
88 \IR{alignment, of elf common variables} alignment, of \c{elf} common
90 \IR{alignment, in obj sections} alignment, in \c{obj} sections
91 \IR{a.out, bsd version} \c{a.out}, BSD version
92 \IR{a.out, linux version} \c{a.out}, Linux version
93 \IR{autoconf} Autoconf
95 \IR{bitwise and} bitwise AND
96 \IR{bitwise or} bitwise OR
97 \IR{bitwise xor} bitwise XOR
98 \IR{block ifs} block IFs
99 \IR{borland pascal} Borland, Pascal
100 \IR{borland's win32 compilers} Borland, Win32 compilers
101 \IR{braces, after % sign} braces, after \c{%} sign
103 \IR{c calling convention} C calling convention
104 \IR{c symbol names} C symbol names
105 \IA{critical expressions}{critical expression}
106 \IA{command line}{command-line}
107 \IA{case sensitivity}{case sensitive}
108 \IA{case-sensitive}{case sensitive}
109 \IA{case-insensitive}{case sensitive}
110 \IA{character constants}{character constant}
111 \IR{common object file format} Common Object File Format
112 \IR{common variables, alignment in elf} common variables, alignment
114 \IR{common, elf extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{elf} extensions to
115 \IR{common, obj extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{obj} extensions to
116 \IR{declaring structure} declaring structures
117 \IR{default-wrt mechanism} default-\c{WRT} mechanism
120 \IR{dll symbols, exporting} DLL symbols, exporting
121 \IR{dll symbols, importing} DLL symbols, importing
123 \IR{dos archive} DOS archive
124 \IR{dos source archive} DOS source archive
125 \IA{effective address}{effective addresses}
126 \IA{effective-address}{effective addresses}
128 \IR{elf, 16-bit code and} ELF, 16-bit code and
129 \IR{elf shared libraries} ELF, shared libraries
130 \IR{executable and linkable format} Executable and Linkable Format
131 \IR{extern, obj extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{obj} extensions to
132 \IR{extern, rdf extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{rdf} extensions to
133 \IR{floating-point, constants} floating-point, constants
134 \IR{floating-point, packed bcd constants} floating-point, packed BCD constants
136 \IR{freelink} FreeLink
137 \IR{functions, c calling convention} functions, C calling convention
138 \IR{functions, pascal calling convention} functions, Pascal calling
140 \IR{global, aoutb extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{aoutb} extensions to
141 \IR{global, elf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{elf} extensions to
142 \IR{global, rdf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{rdf} extensions to
144 \IR{got relocations} \c{GOT} relocations
145 \IR{gotoff relocation} \c{GOTOFF} relocations
146 \IR{gotpc relocation} \c{GOTPC} relocations
147 \IR{intel number formats} Intel number formats
148 \IR{linux, elf} Linux, ELF
149 \IR{linux, a.out} Linux, \c{a.out}
150 \IR{linux, as86} Linux, \c{as86}
151 \IR{logical and} logical AND
152 \IR{logical or} logical OR
153 \IR{logical xor} logical XOR
155 \IA{memory reference}{memory references}
157 \IA{misc directory}{misc subdirectory}
158 \IR{misc subdirectory} \c{misc} subdirectory
159 \IR{microsoft omf} Microsoft OMF
160 \IR{mmx registers} MMX registers
161 \IA{modr/m}{modr/m byte}
162 \IR{modr/m byte} ModR/M byte
164 \IR{ms-dos device drivers} MS-DOS device drivers
165 \IR{multipush} \c{multipush} macro
167 \IR{nasm version} NASM version
171 \IR{operating system} operating system
173 \IR{pascal calling convention}Pascal calling convention
174 \IR{passes} passes, assembly
179 \IR{plt} \c{PLT} relocations
180 \IA{pre-defining macros}{pre-define}
181 \IA{preprocessor expressions}{preprocessor, expressions}
182 \IA{preprocessor loops}{preprocessor, loops}
183 \IA{preprocessor variables}{preprocessor, variables}
184 \IA{rdoff subdirectory}{rdoff}
185 \IR{rdoff} \c{rdoff} subdirectory
186 \IR{relocatable dynamic object file format} Relocatable Dynamic
188 \IR{relocations, pic-specific} relocations, PIC-specific
189 \IA{repeating}{repeating code}
190 \IR{section alignment, in elf} section alignment, in \c{elf}
191 \IR{section alignment, in bin} section alignment, in \c{bin}
192 \IR{section alignment, in obj} section alignment, in \c{obj}
193 \IR{section alignment, in win32} section alignment, in \c{win32}
194 \IR{section, elf extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{elf} extensions to
195 \IR{section, win32 extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{win32} extensions to
196 \IR{segment alignment, in bin} segment alignment, in \c{bin}
197 \IR{segment alignment, in obj} segment alignment, in \c{obj}
198 \IR{segment, obj extensions to} \c{SEGMENT}, \c{elf} extensions to
199 \IR{segment names, borland pascal} segment names, Borland Pascal
200 \IR{shift command} \c{shift} command
202 \IR{sib byte} SIB byte
203 \IR{align, smart} \c{ALIGN}, smart
204 \IR{solaris x86} Solaris x86
205 \IA{standard section names}{standardized section names}
206 \IR{symbols, exporting from dlls} symbols, exporting from DLLs
207 \IR{symbols, importing from dlls} symbols, importing from DLLs
208 \IR{test subdirectory} \c{test} subdirectory
210 \IR{underscore, in c symbols} underscore, in C symbols
216 \IA{sco unix}{unix, sco}
217 \IR{unix, sco} Unix, SCO
218 \IA{unix source archive}{unix, source archive}
219 \IR{unix, source archive} Unix, source archive
220 \IA{unix system v}{unix, system v}
221 \IR{unix, system v} Unix, System V
222 \IR{unixware} UnixWare
224 \IR{version number of nasm} version number of NASM
225 \IR{visual c++} Visual C++
226 \IR{www page} WWW page
230 \IR{windows 95} Windows 95
231 \IR{windows nt} Windows NT
232 \# \IC{program entry point}{entry point, program}
233 \# \IC{program entry point}{start point, program}
234 \# \IC{MS-DOS device drivers}{device drivers, MS-DOS}
235 \# \IC{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}{32-bit mode, versus 16-bit mode}
236 \# \IC{c symbol names}{symbol names, in C}
239 \C{intro} Introduction
241 \H{whatsnasm} What Is NASM?
243 The Netwide Assembler, NASM, is an 80x86 and x86-64 assembler designed
244 for portability and modularity. It supports a range of object file
245 formats, including Linux and \c{*BSD} \c{a.out}, \c{ELF}, \c{COFF},
246 \c{Mach-O}, Microsoft 16-bit \c{OBJ}, \c{Win32} and \c{Win64}. It will
247 also output plain binary files. Its syntax is designed to be simple
248 and easy to understand, similar to Intel's but less complex. It
249 supports all currently known x86 architectural extensions, and has
250 strong support for macros.
253 \S{yaasm} Why Yet Another Assembler?
255 The Netwide Assembler grew out of an idea on \i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86}
256 (or possibly \i\c{alt.lang.asm} - I forget which), which was
257 essentially that there didn't seem to be a good \e{free} x86-series
258 assembler around, and that maybe someone ought to write one.
260 \b \i\c{a86} is good, but not free, and in particular you don't get any
261 32-bit capability until you pay. It's DOS only, too.
263 \b \i\c{gas} is free, and ports over to DOS and Unix, but it's not
264 very good, since it's designed to be a back end to \i\c{gcc}, which
265 always feeds it correct code. So its error checking is minimal. Also,
266 its syntax is horrible, from the point of view of anyone trying to
267 actually \e{write} anything in it. Plus you can't write 16-bit code in
270 \b \i\c{as86} is specific to Minix and Linux, and (my version at least)
271 doesn't seem to have much (or any) documentation.
273 \b \i\c{MASM} isn't very good, and it's (was) expensive, and it runs only under
276 \b \i\c{TASM} is better, but still strives for MASM compatibility,
277 which means millions of directives and tons of red tape. And its syntax
278 is essentially MASM's, with the contradictions and quirks that
279 entails (although it sorts out some of those by means of Ideal mode.)
280 It's expensive too. And it's DOS-only.
282 So here, for your coding pleasure, is NASM. At present it's
283 still in prototype stage - we don't promise that it can outperform
284 any of these assemblers. But please, \e{please} send us bug reports,
285 fixes, helpful information, and anything else you can get your hands
286 on (and thanks to the many people who've done this already! You all
287 know who you are), and we'll improve it out of all recognition.
291 \S{legal} License Conditions
293 Please see the file \c{COPYING}, supplied as part of any NASM
294 distribution archive, for the \i{license} conditions under which you
295 may use NASM. NASM is now under the so-called GNU Lesser General
296 Public License, LGPL.
299 \H{contact} Contact Information
301 The current version of NASM (since about 0.98.08) is maintained by a
302 team of developers, accessible through the \c{nasm-devel} mailing list
303 (see below for the link).
304 If you want to report a bug, please read \k{bugs} first.
306 NASM has a \i{WWW page} at
307 \W{http://nasm.sourceforge.net}\c{http://nasm.sourceforge.net}. If it's
308 not there, google for us!
311 The original authors are \i{e\-mail}able as
312 \W{mailto:jules@dsf.org.uk}\c{jules@dsf.org.uk} and
313 \W{mailto:anakin@pobox.com}\c{anakin@pobox.com}.
314 The latter is no longer involved in the development team.
316 \i{New releases} of NASM are uploaded to the official sites
317 \W{http://nasm.sourceforge.net}\c{http://nasm.sourceforge.net}
319 \W{ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/devel/nasm/}\i\c{ftp.kernel.org}
321 \W{ftp://ibiblio.org/pub/Linux/devel/lang/assemblers/}\i\c{ibiblio.org}.
323 Announcements are posted to
324 \W{news:comp.lang.asm.x86}\i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86},
325 \W{news:alt.lang.asm}\i\c{alt.lang.asm} and
326 \W{news:comp.os.linux.announce}\i\c{comp.os.linux.announce}
328 If you want information about NASM beta releases, and the current
329 development status, please subscribe to the \i\c{nasm-devel} email list
331 \W{http://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm}\c{http://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm}.
334 \H{install} Installation
336 \S{instdos} \i{Installing} NASM under MS-\i{DOS} or Windows
338 Once you've obtained the appropriate archive for NASM,
339 \i\c{nasm-XXX-dos.zip} or \i\c{nasm-XXX-win32.zip} (where \c{XXX}
340 denotes the version number of NASM contained in the archive), unpack
341 it into its own directory (for example \c{c:\\nasm}).
343 The archive will contain a set of executable files: the NASM
344 executable file \i\c{nasm.exe}, the NDISASM executable file
345 \i\c{ndisasm.exe}, and possibly additional utilities to handle the
348 The only file NASM needs to run is its own executable, so copy
349 \c{nasm.exe} to a directory on your PATH, or alternatively edit
350 \i\c{autoexec.bat} to add the \c{nasm} directory to your
351 \i\c{PATH} (to do that under Windows XP, go to Start > Control Panel >
352 System > Advanced > Environment Variables; these instructions may work
353 under other versions of Windows as well.)
355 That's it - NASM is installed. You don't need the nasm directory
356 to be present to run NASM (unless you've added it to your \c{PATH}),
357 so you can delete it if you need to save space; however, you may
358 want to keep the documentation or test programs.
360 If you've downloaded the \i{DOS source archive}, \i\c{nasm-XXX.zip},
361 the \c{nasm} directory will also contain the full NASM \i{source
362 code}, and a selection of \i{Makefiles} you can (hopefully) use to
363 rebuild your copy of NASM from scratch. See the file \c{INSTALL} in
366 Note that a number of files are generated from other files by Perl
367 scripts. Although the NASM source distribution includes these
368 generated files, you will need to rebuild them (and hence, will need a
369 Perl interpreter) if you change insns.dat, standard.mac or the
370 documentation. It is possible future source distributions may not
371 include these files at all. Ports of \i{Perl} for a variety of
372 platforms, including DOS and Windows, are available from
373 \W{http://www.cpan.org/ports/}\i{www.cpan.org}.
376 \S{instdos} Installing NASM under \i{Unix}
378 Once you've obtained the \i{Unix source archive} for NASM,
379 \i\c{nasm-XXX.tar.gz} (where \c{XXX} denotes the version number of
380 NASM contained in the archive), unpack it into a directory such
381 as \c{/usr/local/src}. The archive, when unpacked, will create its
382 own subdirectory \c{nasm-XXX}.
384 NASM is an \I{Autoconf}\I\c{configure}auto-configuring package: once
385 you've unpacked it, \c{cd} to the directory it's been unpacked into
386 and type \c{./configure}. This shell script will find the best C
387 compiler to use for building NASM and set up \i{Makefiles}
390 Once NASM has auto-configured, you can type \i\c{make} to build the
391 \c{nasm} and \c{ndisasm} binaries, and then \c{make install} to
392 install them in \c{/usr/local/bin} and install the \i{man pages}
393 \i\c{nasm.1} and \i\c{ndisasm.1} in \c{/usr/local/man/man1}.
394 Alternatively, you can give options such as \c{--prefix} to the
395 configure script (see the file \i\c{INSTALL} for more details), or
396 install the programs yourself.
398 NASM also comes with a set of utilities for handling the \c{RDOFF}
399 custom object-file format, which are in the \i\c{rdoff} subdirectory
400 of the NASM archive. You can build these with \c{make rdf} and
401 install them with \c{make rdf_install}, if you want them.
404 \C{running} Running NASM
406 \H{syntax} NASM \i{Command-Line} Syntax
408 To assemble a file, you issue a command of the form
410 \c nasm -f <format> <filename> [-o <output>]
414 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm
416 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into an \c{ELF} object file \c{myfile.o}. And
418 \c nasm -f bin myfile.asm -o myfile.com
420 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into a raw binary file \c{myfile.com}.
422 To produce a listing file, with the hex codes output from NASM
423 displayed on the left of the original sources, use the \c{-l} option
424 to give a listing file name, for example:
426 \c nasm -f coff myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
428 To get further usage instructions from NASM, try typing
432 As \c{-hf}, this will also list the available output file formats, and what they
435 If you use Linux but aren't sure whether your system is \c{a.out}
440 (in the directory in which you put the NASM binary when you
441 installed it). If it says something like
443 \c nasm: ELF 32-bit LSB executable i386 (386 and up) Version 1
445 then your system is \c{ELF}, and you should use the option \c{-f elf}
446 when you want NASM to produce Linux object files. If it says
448 \c nasm: Linux/i386 demand-paged executable (QMAGIC)
450 or something similar, your system is \c{a.out}, and you should use
451 \c{-f aout} instead (Linux \c{a.out} systems have long been obsolete,
452 and are rare these days.)
454 Like Unix compilers and assemblers, NASM is silent unless it
455 goes wrong: you won't see any output at all, unless it gives error
459 \S{opt-o} The \i\c{-o} Option: Specifying the Output File Name
461 NASM will normally choose the name of your output file for you;
462 precisely how it does this is dependent on the object file format.
463 For Microsoft object file formats (\i\c{obj} and \i\c{win32}), it
464 will remove the \c{.asm} \i{extension} (or whatever extension you
465 like to use - NASM doesn't care) from your source file name and
466 substitute \c{.obj}. For Unix object file formats (\i\c{aout},
467 \i\c{coff}, \i\c{elf}, \i\c{macho} and \i\c{as86}) it will substitute \c{.o}. For
468 \i\c{rdf}, it will use \c{.rdf}, and for the \i\c{bin} format it
469 will simply remove the extension, so that \c{myfile.asm} produces
470 the output file \c{myfile}.
472 If the output file already exists, NASM will overwrite it, unless it
473 has the same name as the input file, in which case it will give a
474 warning and use \i\c{nasm.out} as the output file name instead.
476 For situations in which this behaviour is unacceptable, NASM
477 provides the \c{-o} command-line option, which allows you to specify
478 your desired output file name. You invoke \c{-o} by following it
479 with the name you wish for the output file, either with or without
480 an intervening space. For example:
482 \c nasm -f bin program.asm -o program.com
483 \c nasm -f bin driver.asm -odriver.sys
485 Note that this is a small o, and is different from a capital O , which
486 is used to specify the number of optimisation passes required. See \k{opt-O}.
489 \S{opt-f} The \i\c{-f} Option: Specifying the \i{Output File Format}
491 If you do not supply the \c{-f} option to NASM, it will choose an
492 output file format for you itself. In the distribution versions of
493 NASM, the default is always \i\c{bin}; if you've compiled your own
494 copy of NASM, you can redefine \i\c{OF_DEFAULT} at compile time and
495 choose what you want the default to be.
497 Like \c{-o}, the intervening space between \c{-f} and the output
498 file format is optional; so \c{-f elf} and \c{-felf} are both valid.
500 A complete list of the available output file formats can be given by
501 issuing the command \i\c{nasm -hf}.
504 \S{opt-l} The \i\c{-l} Option: Generating a \i{Listing File}
506 If you supply the \c{-l} option to NASM, followed (with the usual
507 optional space) by a file name, NASM will generate a
508 \i{source-listing file} for you, in which addresses and generated
509 code are listed on the left, and the actual source code, with
510 expansions of multi-line macros (except those which specifically
511 request no expansion in source listings: see \k{nolist}) on the
514 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
516 If a list file is selected, you may turn off listing for a
517 section of your source with \c{[list -]}, and turn it back on
518 with \c{[list +]}, (the default, obviously). There is no "user
519 form" (without the brackets). This can be used to list only
520 sections of interest, avoiding excessively long listings.
523 \S{opt-M} The \i\c{-M} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
525 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
526 This can be redirected to a file for further processing. For example:
528 \c nasm -M myfile.asm > myfile.dep
531 \S{opt-MG} The \i\c{-MG} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
533 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
534 This differs from the \c{-M} option in that if a nonexisting file is
535 encountered, it is assumed to be a generated file and is added to the
536 dependency list without a prefix.
539 \S{opt-MF} The \i\c\{-MF} Option: Set Makefile Dependency File
541 This option can be used with the \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options to send the
542 output to a file, rather than to stdout. For example:
544 \c nasm -M -MF myfile.dep myfile.asm
547 \S{opt-MD} The \i\c{-MD} Option: Assemble and Generate Dependencies
549 The \c{-MD} option acts as the combination of the \c{-M} and \c{-MF}
550 options (i.e. a filename has to be specified.) However, unlike the
551 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options, \c{-MD} does \e{not} inhibit the normal
552 operation of the assembler. Use this to automatically generate
553 updated dependencies with every assembly session. For example:
555 \c nasm -f elf -o myfile.o -MD myfile.dep myfile.asm
558 \S{opt-MT} The \i\c{-MT} Option: Dependency Target Name
560 The \c{-MT} option can be used to override the default name of the
561 dependency target. This is normally the same as the output filename,
562 specified by the \c{-o} option.
565 \S{opt-MQ} The \i\c{-MQ} Option: Dependency Target Name (Quoted)
567 The \c{-MQ} option acts as the \c{-MT} option, except it tries to
568 quote characters that have special meaning in Makefile syntax. This
569 is not foolproof, as not all characters with special meaning are
573 \S{opt-MP} The \i\c{-MP} Option: Emit phony targets
575 When used with any of the dependency generation options, the \c{-MP}
576 option causes NASM to emit a phony target without dependencies for
577 each header file. This prevents Make from complaining if a header
578 file has been removed.
581 \S{opt-F} The \i\c{-F} Option: Selecting a \i{Debug Information Format}
583 This option is used to select the format of the debug information
584 emitted into the output file, to be used by a debugger (or \e{will}
585 be). Prior to version 2.03.01, the use of this switch did \e{not} enable
586 output of the selected debug info format. Use \c{-g}, see \k{opt-g},
587 to enable output. Versions 2.03.01 and later automatically enable \c{-g}
588 if \c{-F} is specified.
590 A complete list of the available debug file formats for an output
591 format can be seen by issuing the command \c{nasm -f <format> -y}. Not
592 all output formats currently support debugging output. See \k{opt-y}.
594 This should not be confused with the \c{-f dbg} output format option which
595 is not built into NASM by default. For information on how
596 to enable it when building from the sources, see \k{dbgfmt}.
599 \S{opt-g} The \i\c{-g} Option: Enabling \i{Debug Information}.
601 This option can be used to generate debugging information in the specified
602 format. See \k{opt-F}. Using \c{-g} without \c{-F} results in emitting
603 debug info in the default format, if any, for the selected output format.
604 If no debug information is currently implemented in the selected output
605 format, \c{-g} is \e{silently ignored}.
608 \S{opt-X} The \i\c{-X} Option: Selecting an \i{Error Reporting Format}
610 This option can be used to select an error reporting format for any
611 error messages that might be produced by NASM.
613 Currently, two error reporting formats may be selected. They are
614 the \c{-Xvc} option and the \c{-Xgnu} option. The GNU format is
615 the default and looks like this:
617 \c filename.asm:65: error: specific error message
619 where \c{filename.asm} is the name of the source file in which the
620 error was detected, \c{65} is the source file line number on which
621 the error was detected, \c{error} is the severity of the error (this
622 could be \c{warning}), and \c{specific error message} is a more
623 detailed text message which should help pinpoint the exact problem.
625 The other format, specified by \c{-Xvc} is the style used by Microsoft
626 Visual C++ and some other programs. It looks like this:
628 \c filename.asm(65) : error: specific error message
630 where the only difference is that the line number is in parentheses
631 instead of being delimited by colons.
633 See also the \c{Visual C++} output format, \k{win32fmt}.
635 \S{opt-Z} The \i\c{-Z} Option: Send Errors to a File
637 Under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS} it can be difficult (though there are ways) to
638 redirect the standard-error output of a program to a file. Since
639 NASM usually produces its warning and \i{error messages} on
640 \i\c{stderr}, this can make it hard to capture the errors if (for
641 example) you want to load them into an editor.
643 NASM therefore provides the \c{-Z} option, taking a filename argument
644 which causes errors to be sent to the specified files rather than
645 standard error. Therefore you can \I{redirecting errors}redirect
646 the errors into a file by typing
648 \c nasm -Z myfile.err -f obj myfile.asm
650 In earlier versions of NASM, this option was called \c{-E}, but it was
651 changed since \c{-E} is an option conventionally used for
652 preprocessing only, with disastrous results. See \k{opt-E}.
654 \S{opt-s} The \i\c{-s} Option: Send Errors to \i\c{stdout}
656 The \c{-s} option redirects \i{error messages} to \c{stdout} rather
657 than \c{stderr}, so it can be redirected under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS}. To
658 assemble the file \c{myfile.asm} and pipe its output to the \c{more}
659 program, you can type:
661 \c nasm -s -f obj myfile.asm | more
663 See also the \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
666 \S{opt-i} The \i\c{-i}\I\c{-I} Option: Include File Search Directories
668 When NASM sees the \i\c{%include} or \i\c{%pathsearch} directive in a
669 source file (see \k{include}, \k{pathsearch} or \k{incbin}), it will
670 search for the given file not only in the current directory, but also
671 in any directories specified on the command line by the use of the
672 \c{-i} option. Therefore you can include files from a \i{macro
673 library}, for example, by typing
675 \c nasm -ic:\macrolib\ -f obj myfile.asm
677 (As usual, a space between \c{-i} and the path name is allowed, and
680 NASM, in the interests of complete source-code portability, does not
681 understand the file naming conventions of the OS it is running on;
682 the string you provide as an argument to the \c{-i} option will be
683 prepended exactly as written to the name of the include file.
684 Therefore the trailing backslash in the above example is necessary.
685 Under Unix, a trailing forward slash is similarly necessary.
687 (You can use this to your advantage, if you're really \i{perverse},
688 by noting that the option \c{-ifoo} will cause \c{%include "bar.i"}
689 to search for the file \c{foobar.i}...)
691 If you want to define a \e{standard} \i{include search path},
692 similar to \c{/usr/include} on Unix systems, you should place one or
693 more \c{-i} directives in the \c{NASMENV} environment variable (see
696 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
697 be specified as \c{-I}.
700 \S{opt-p} The \i\c{-p}\I\c{-P} Option: \I{pre-including files}Pre-Include a File
702 \I\c{%include}NASM allows you to specify files to be
703 \e{pre-included} into your source file, by the use of the \c{-p}
706 \c nasm myfile.asm -p myinc.inc
708 is equivalent to running \c{nasm myfile.asm} and placing the
709 directive \c{%include "myinc.inc"} at the start of the file.
711 For consistency with the \c{-I}, \c{-D} and \c{-U} options, this
712 option can also be specified as \c{-P}.
715 \S{opt-d} The \i\c{-d}\I\c{-D} Option: \I{pre-defining macros}Pre-Define a Macro
717 \I\c{%define}Just as the \c{-p} option gives an alternative to placing
718 \c{%include} directives at the start of a source file, the \c{-d}
719 option gives an alternative to placing a \c{%define} directive. You
722 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100
724 as an alternative to placing the directive
728 at the start of the file. You can miss off the macro value, as well:
729 the option \c{-dFOO} is equivalent to coding \c{%define FOO}. This
730 form of the directive may be useful for selecting \i{assembly-time
731 options} which are then tested using \c{%ifdef}, for example
734 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
735 be specified as \c{-D}.
738 \S{opt-u} The \i\c{-u}\I\c{-U} Option: \I{Undefining macros}Undefine a Macro
740 \I\c{%undef}The \c{-u} option undefines a macro that would otherwise
741 have been pre-defined, either automatically or by a \c{-p} or \c{-d}
742 option specified earlier on the command lines.
744 For example, the following command line:
746 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100 -uFOO
748 would result in \c{FOO} \e{not} being a predefined macro in the
749 program. This is useful to override options specified at a different
752 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
753 be specified as \c{-U}.
756 \S{opt-E} The \i\c{-E}\I{-e} Option: Preprocess Only
758 NASM allows the \i{preprocessor} to be run on its own, up to a
759 point. Using the \c{-E} option (which requires no arguments) will
760 cause NASM to preprocess its input file, expand all the macro
761 references, remove all the comments and preprocessor directives, and
762 print the resulting file on standard output (or save it to a file,
763 if the \c{-o} option is also used).
765 This option cannot be applied to programs which require the
766 preprocessor to evaluate \I{preprocessor expressions}\i{expressions}
767 which depend on the values of symbols: so code such as
769 \c %assign tablesize ($-tablestart)
771 will cause an error in \i{preprocess-only mode}.
773 For compatiblity with older version of NASM, this option can also be
774 written \c{-e}. \c{-E} in older versions of NASM was the equivalent
775 of the current \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
777 \S{opt-a} The \i\c{-a} Option: Don't Preprocess At All
779 If NASM is being used as the back end to a compiler, it might be
780 desirable to \I{suppressing preprocessing}suppress preprocessing
781 completely and assume the compiler has already done it, to save time
782 and increase compilation speeds. The \c{-a} option, requiring no
783 argument, instructs NASM to replace its powerful \i{preprocessor}
784 with a \i{stub preprocessor} which does nothing.
787 \S{opt-O} The \i\c{-O} Option: Specifying \i{Multipass Optimization}
789 NASM defaults to not optimizing operands which can fit into a signed byte.
790 This means that if you want the shortest possible object code,
791 you have to enable optimization.
793 Using the \c{-O} option, you can tell NASM to carry out different
794 levels of optimization. The syntax is:
796 \b \c{-O0}: No optimization. All operands take their long forms,
797 if a short form is not specified, except conditional jumps.
798 This is intended to match NASM 0.98 behavior.
800 \b \c{-O1}: Minimal optimization. As above, but immediate operands
801 which will fit in a signed byte are optimized,
802 unless the long form is specified. Conditional jumps default
803 to the long form unless otherwise specified.
805 \b \c{-Ox} (where \c{x} is the actual letter \c{x}): Multipass optimization.
806 Minimize branch offsets and signed immediate bytes,
807 overriding size specification unless the \c{strict} keyword
808 has been used (see \k{strict}). For compatability with earlier
809 releases, the letter \c{x} may also be any number greater than
810 one. This number has no effect on the actual number of passes.
812 The \c{-Ox} mode is recommended for most uses.
814 Note that this is a capital \c{O}, and is different from a small \c{o}, which
815 is used to specify the output file name. See \k{opt-o}.
818 \S{opt-t} The \i\c{-t} Option: Enable TASM Compatibility Mode
820 NASM includes a limited form of compatibility with Borland's \i\c{TASM}.
821 When NASM's \c{-t} option is used, the following changes are made:
823 \b local labels may be prefixed with \c{@@} instead of \c{.}
825 \b size override is supported within brackets. In TASM compatible mode,
826 a size override inside square brackets changes the size of the operand,
827 and not the address type of the operand as it does in NASM syntax. E.g.
828 \c{mov eax,[DWORD val]} is valid syntax in TASM compatibility mode.
829 Note that you lose the ability to override the default address type for
832 \b unprefixed forms of some directives supported (\c{arg}, \c{elif},
833 \c{else}, \c{endif}, \c{if}, \c{ifdef}, \c{ifdifi}, \c{ifndef},
834 \c{include}, \c{local})
836 \S{opt-w} The \i\c{-w} and \i\c{-W} Options: Enable or Disable Assembly \i{Warnings}
838 NASM can observe many conditions during the course of assembly which
839 are worth mentioning to the user, but not a sufficiently severe
840 error to justify NASM refusing to generate an output file. These
841 conditions are reported like errors, but come up with the word
842 `warning' before the message. Warnings do not prevent NASM from
843 generating an output file and returning a success status to the
846 Some conditions are even less severe than that: they are only
847 sometimes worth mentioning to the user. Therefore NASM supports the
848 \c{-w} command-line option, which enables or disables certain
849 classes of assembly warning. Such warning classes are described by a
850 name, for example \c{orphan-labels}; you can enable warnings of
851 this class by the command-line option \c{-w+orphan-labels} and
852 disable it by \c{-w-orphan-labels}.
854 The \i{suppressible warning} classes are:
856 \b \i\c{macro-params} covers warnings about \i{multi-line macros}
857 being invoked with the wrong number of parameters. This warning
858 class is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacover} for an example of why
859 you might want to disable it.
861 \b \i\c{macro-selfref} warns if a macro references itself. This
862 warning class is disabled by default.
864 \b\i\c{macro-defaults} warns when a macro has more default
865 parameters than optional parameters. This warning class
866 is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacdef} for why you might want to disable it.
868 \b \i\c{orphan-labels} covers warnings about source lines which
869 contain no instruction but define a label without a trailing colon.
870 NASM warns about this somewhat obscure condition by default;
871 see \k{syntax} for more information.
873 \b \i\c{number-overflow} covers warnings about numeric constants which
874 don't fit in 64 bits. This warning class is enabled by default.
876 \b \i\c{gnu-elf-extensions} warns if 8-bit or 16-bit relocations
877 are used in \c{-f elf} format. The GNU extensions allow this.
878 This warning class is disabled by default.
880 \b \i\c{float-overflow} warns about floating point overflow.
883 \b \i\c{float-denorm} warns about floating point denormals.
886 \b \i\c{float-underflow} warns about floating point underflow.
889 \b \i\c{float-toolong} warns about too many digits in floating-point numbers.
892 \b \i\c{user} controls \c{%warning} directives (see \k{pperror}).
895 \b \i\c{error} causes warnings to be treated as errors. Disabled by
898 \b \i\c{all} is an alias for \e{all} suppressible warning classes (not
899 including \c{error}). Thus, \c{-w+all} enables all available warnings.
901 In addition, you can set warning classes across sections.
902 Warning classes may be enabled with \i\c{[warning +warning-name]},
903 disabled with \i\c{[warning -warning-name]} or reset to their
904 original value with \i\c{[warning *warning-name]}. No "user form"
905 (without the brackets) exists.
907 Since version 2.00, NASM has also supported the gcc-like syntax
908 \c{-Wwarning} and \c{-Wno-warning} instead of \c{-w+warning} and
909 \c{-w-warning}, respectively.
912 \S{opt-v} The \i\c{-v} Option: Display \i{Version} Info
914 Typing \c{NASM -v} will display the version of NASM which you are using,
915 and the date on which it was compiled.
917 You will need the version number if you report a bug.
919 \S{opt-y} The \i\c{-y} Option: Display Available Debug Info Formats
921 Typing \c{nasm -f <option> -y} will display a list of the available
922 debug info formats for the given output format. The default format
923 is indicated by an asterisk. For example:
927 \c valid debug formats for 'elf32' output format are
928 \c ('*' denotes default):
929 \c * stabs ELF32 (i386) stabs debug format for Linux
930 \c dwarf elf32 (i386) dwarf debug format for Linux
933 \S{opt-pfix} The \i\c{--prefix} and \i\c{--postfix} Options.
935 The \c{--prefix} and \c{--postfix} options prepend or append
936 (respectively) the given argument to all \c{global} or
937 \c{extern} variables. E.g. \c{--prefix _} will prepend the
938 underscore to all global and external variables, as C sometimes
939 (but not always) likes it.
942 \S{nasmenv} The \i\c{NASMENV} \i{Environment} Variable
944 If you define an environment variable called \c{NASMENV}, the program
945 will interpret it as a list of extra command-line options, which are
946 processed before the real command line. You can use this to define
947 standard search directories for include files, by putting \c{-i}
948 options in the \c{NASMENV} variable.
950 The value of the variable is split up at white space, so that the
951 value \c{-s -ic:\\nasmlib} will be treated as two separate options.
952 However, that means that the value \c{-dNAME="my name"} won't do
953 what you might want, because it will be split at the space and the
954 NASM command-line processing will get confused by the two
955 nonsensical words \c{-dNAME="my} and \c{name"}.
957 To get round this, NASM provides a feature whereby, if you begin the
958 \c{NASMENV} environment variable with some character that isn't a minus
959 sign, then NASM will treat this character as the \i{separator
960 character} for options. So setting the \c{NASMENV} variable to the
961 value \c{!-s!-ic:\\nasmlib} is equivalent to setting it to \c{-s
962 -ic:\\nasmlib}, but \c{!-dNAME="my name"} will work.
964 This environment variable was previously called \c{NASM}. This was
965 changed with version 0.98.31.
968 \H{qstart} \i{Quick Start} for \i{MASM} Users
970 If you're used to writing programs with MASM, or with \i{TASM} in
971 MASM-compatible (non-Ideal) mode, or with \i\c{a86}, this section
972 attempts to outline the major differences between MASM's syntax and
973 NASM's. If you're not already used to MASM, it's probably worth
974 skipping this section.
977 \S{qscs} NASM Is \I{case sensitivity}Case-Sensitive
979 One simple difference is that NASM is case-sensitive. It makes a
980 difference whether you call your label \c{foo}, \c{Foo} or \c{FOO}.
981 If you're assembling to \c{DOS} or \c{OS/2} \c{.OBJ} files, you can
982 invoke the \i\c{UPPERCASE} directive (documented in \k{objfmt}) to
983 ensure that all symbols exported to other code modules are forced
984 to be upper case; but even then, \e{within} a single module, NASM
985 will distinguish between labels differing only in case.
988 \S{qsbrackets} NASM Requires \i{Square Brackets} For \i{Memory References}
990 NASM was designed with simplicity of syntax in mind. One of the
991 \i{design goals} of NASM is that it should be possible, as far as is
992 practical, for the user to look at a single line of NASM code
993 and tell what opcode is generated by it. You can't do this in MASM:
994 if you declare, for example,
999 then the two lines of code
1004 generate completely different opcodes, despite having
1005 identical-looking syntaxes.
1007 NASM avoids this undesirable situation by having a much simpler
1008 syntax for memory references. The rule is simply that any access to
1009 the \e{contents} of a memory location requires square brackets
1010 around the address, and any access to the \e{address} of a variable
1011 doesn't. So an instruction of the form \c{mov ax,foo} will
1012 \e{always} refer to a compile-time constant, whether it's an \c{EQU}
1013 or the address of a variable; and to access the \e{contents} of the
1014 variable \c{bar}, you must code \c{mov ax,[bar]}.
1016 This also means that NASM has no need for MASM's \i\c{OFFSET}
1017 keyword, since the MASM code \c{mov ax,offset bar} means exactly the
1018 same thing as NASM's \c{mov ax,bar}. If you're trying to get
1019 large amounts of MASM code to assemble sensibly under NASM, you
1020 can always code \c{%idefine offset} to make the preprocessor treat
1021 the \c{OFFSET} keyword as a no-op.
1023 This issue is even more confusing in \i\c{a86}, where declaring a
1024 label with a trailing colon defines it to be a `label' as opposed to
1025 a `variable' and causes \c{a86} to adopt NASM-style semantics; so in
1026 \c{a86}, \c{mov ax,var} has different behaviour depending on whether
1027 \c{var} was declared as \c{var: dw 0} (a label) or \c{var dw 0} (a
1028 word-size variable). NASM is very simple by comparison:
1029 \e{everything} is a label.
1031 NASM, in the interests of simplicity, also does not support the
1032 \i{hybrid syntaxes} supported by MASM and its clones, such as
1033 \c{mov ax,table[bx]}, where a memory reference is denoted by one
1034 portion outside square brackets and another portion inside. The
1035 correct syntax for the above is \c{mov ax,[table+bx]}. Likewise,
1036 \c{mov ax,es:[di]} is wrong and \c{mov ax,[es:di]} is right.
1039 \S{qstypes} NASM Doesn't Store \i{Variable Types}
1041 NASM, by design, chooses not to remember the types of variables you
1042 declare. Whereas MASM will remember, on seeing \c{var dw 0}, that
1043 you declared \c{var} as a word-size variable, and will then be able
1044 to fill in the \i{ambiguity} in the size of the instruction \c{mov
1045 var,2}, NASM will deliberately remember nothing about the symbol
1046 \c{var} except where it begins, and so you must explicitly code
1047 \c{mov word [var],2}.
1049 For this reason, NASM doesn't support the \c{LODS}, \c{MOVS},
1050 \c{STOS}, \c{SCAS}, \c{CMPS}, \c{INS}, or \c{OUTS} instructions,
1051 but only supports the forms such as \c{LODSB}, \c{MOVSW}, and
1052 \c{SCASD}, which explicitly specify the size of the components of
1053 the strings being manipulated.
1056 \S{qsassume} NASM Doesn't \i\c{ASSUME}
1058 As part of NASM's drive for simplicity, it also does not support the
1059 \c{ASSUME} directive. NASM will not keep track of what values you
1060 choose to put in your segment registers, and will never
1061 \e{automatically} generate a \i{segment override} prefix.
1064 \S{qsmodel} NASM Doesn't Support \i{Memory Models}
1066 NASM also does not have any directives to support different 16-bit
1067 memory models. The programmer has to keep track of which functions
1068 are supposed to be called with a \i{far call} and which with a
1069 \i{near call}, and is responsible for putting the correct form of
1070 \c{RET} instruction (\c{RETN} or \c{RETF}; NASM accepts \c{RET}
1071 itself as an alternate form for \c{RETN}); in addition, the
1072 programmer is responsible for coding CALL FAR instructions where
1073 necessary when calling \e{external} functions, and must also keep
1074 track of which external variable definitions are far and which are
1078 \S{qsfpu} \i{Floating-Point} Differences
1080 NASM uses different names to refer to floating-point registers from
1081 MASM: where MASM would call them \c{ST(0)}, \c{ST(1)} and so on, and
1082 \i\c{a86} would call them simply \c{0}, \c{1} and so on, NASM
1083 chooses to call them \c{st0}, \c{st1} etc.
1085 As of version 0.96, NASM now treats the instructions with
1086 \i{`nowait'} forms in the same way as MASM-compatible assemblers.
1087 The idiosyncratic treatment employed by 0.95 and earlier was based
1088 on a misunderstanding by the authors.
1091 \S{qsother} Other Differences
1093 For historical reasons, NASM uses the keyword \i\c{TWORD} where MASM
1094 and compatible assemblers use \i\c{TBYTE}.
1096 NASM does not declare \i{uninitialized storage} in the same way as
1097 MASM: where a MASM programmer might use \c{stack db 64 dup (?)},
1098 NASM requires \c{stack resb 64}, intended to be read as `reserve 64
1099 bytes'. For a limited amount of compatibility, since NASM treats
1100 \c{?} as a valid character in symbol names, you can code \c{? equ 0}
1101 and then writing \c{dw ?} will at least do something vaguely useful.
1102 \I\c{RESB}\i\c{DUP} is still not a supported syntax, however.
1104 In addition to all of this, macros and directives work completely
1105 differently to MASM. See \k{preproc} and \k{directive} for further
1109 \C{lang} The NASM Language
1111 \H{syntax} Layout of a NASM Source Line
1113 Like most assemblers, each NASM source line contains (unless it
1114 is a macro, a preprocessor directive or an assembler directive: see
1115 \k{preproc} and \k{directive}) some combination of the four fields
1117 \c label: instruction operands ; comment
1119 As usual, most of these fields are optional; the presence or absence
1120 of any combination of a label, an instruction and a comment is allowed.
1121 Of course, the operand field is either required or forbidden by the
1122 presence and nature of the instruction field.
1124 NASM uses backslash (\\) as the line continuation character; if a line
1125 ends with backslash, the next line is considered to be a part of the
1126 backslash-ended line.
1128 NASM places no restrictions on white space within a line: labels may
1129 have white space before them, or instructions may have no space
1130 before them, or anything. The \i{colon} after a label is also
1131 optional. (Note that this means that if you intend to code \c{lodsb}
1132 alone on a line, and type \c{lodab} by accident, then that's still a
1133 valid source line which does nothing but define a label. Running
1134 NASM with the command-line option
1135 \I{orphan-labels}\c{-w+orphan-labels} will cause it to warn you if
1136 you define a label alone on a line without a \i{trailing colon}.)
1138 \i{Valid characters} in labels are letters, numbers, \c{_}, \c{$},
1139 \c{#}, \c{@}, \c{~}, \c{.}, and \c{?}. The only characters which may
1140 be used as the \e{first} character of an identifier are letters,
1141 \c{.} (with special meaning: see \k{locallab}), \c{_} and \c{?}.
1142 An identifier may also be prefixed with a \I{$, prefix}\c{$} to
1143 indicate that it is intended to be read as an identifier and not a
1144 reserved word; thus, if some other module you are linking with
1145 defines a symbol called \c{eax}, you can refer to \c{$eax} in NASM
1146 code to distinguish the symbol from the register. Maximum length of
1147 an identifier is 4095 characters.
1149 The instruction field may contain any machine instruction: Pentium
1150 and P6 instructions, FPU instructions, MMX instructions and even
1151 undocumented instructions are all supported. The instruction may be
1152 prefixed by \c{LOCK}, \c{REP}, \c{REPE}/\c{REPZ} or
1153 \c{REPNE}/\c{REPNZ}, in the usual way. Explicit \I{address-size
1154 prefixes}address-size and \i{operand-size prefixes} \i\c{A16},
1155 \i\c{A32}, \i\c{A64}, \i\c{O16} and \i\c{O32}, \i\c{O64} are provided - one example of their use
1156 is given in \k{mixsize}. You can also use the name of a \I{segment
1157 override}segment register as an instruction prefix: coding
1158 \c{es mov [bx],ax} is equivalent to coding \c{mov [es:bx],ax}. We
1159 recommend the latter syntax, since it is consistent with other
1160 syntactic features of the language, but for instructions such as
1161 \c{LODSB}, which has no operands and yet can require a segment
1162 override, there is no clean syntactic way to proceed apart from
1165 An instruction is not required to use a prefix: prefixes such as
1166 \c{CS}, \c{A32}, \c{LOCK} or \c{REPE} can appear on a line by
1167 themselves, and NASM will just generate the prefix bytes.
1169 In addition to actual machine instructions, NASM also supports a
1170 number of pseudo-instructions, described in \k{pseudop}.
1172 Instruction \i{operands} may take a number of forms: they can be
1173 registers, described simply by the register name (e.g. \c{ax},
1174 \c{bp}, \c{ebx}, \c{cr0}: NASM does not use the \c{gas}-style
1175 syntax in which register names must be prefixed by a \c{%} sign), or
1176 they can be \i{effective addresses} (see \k{effaddr}), constants
1177 (\k{const}) or expressions (\k{expr}).
1179 For x87 \i{floating-point} instructions, NASM accepts a wide range of
1180 syntaxes: you can use two-operand forms like MASM supports, or you
1181 can use NASM's native single-operand forms in most cases.
1183 \# all forms of each supported instruction are given in
1185 For example, you can code:
1187 \c fadd st1 ; this sets st0 := st0 + st1
1188 \c fadd st0,st1 ; so does this
1190 \c fadd st1,st0 ; this sets st1 := st1 + st0
1191 \c fadd to st1 ; so does this
1193 Almost any x87 floating-point instruction that references memory must
1194 use one of the prefixes \i\c{DWORD}, \i\c{QWORD} or \i\c{TWORD} to
1195 indicate what size of \i{memory operand} it refers to.
1198 \H{pseudop} \i{Pseudo-Instructions}
1200 Pseudo-instructions are things which, though not real x86 machine
1201 instructions, are used in the instruction field anyway because that's
1202 the most convenient place to put them. The current pseudo-instructions
1203 are \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1204 \i\c{DY}; their \i{uninitialized} counterparts \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW},
1205 \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO} and \i\c{RESY}; the
1206 \i\c{INCBIN} command, the \i\c{EQU} command, and the \i\c{TIMES}
1210 \S{db} \c{DB} and Friends: Declaring Initialized Data
1212 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1213 \i\c{DY} are used, much as in MASM, to declare initialized data in the
1214 output file. They can be invoked in a wide range of ways:
1215 \I{floating-point}\I{character constant}\I{string constant}
1217 \c db 0x55 ; just the byte 0x55
1218 \c db 0x55,0x56,0x57 ; three bytes in succession
1219 \c db 'a',0x55 ; character constants are OK
1220 \c db 'hello',13,10,'$' ; so are string constants
1221 \c dw 0x1234 ; 0x34 0x12
1222 \c dw 'a' ; 0x61 0x00 (it's just a number)
1223 \c dw 'ab' ; 0x61 0x62 (character constant)
1224 \c dw 'abc' ; 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x00 (string)
1225 \c dd 0x12345678 ; 0x78 0x56 0x34 0x12
1226 \c dd 1.234567e20 ; floating-point constant
1227 \c dq 0x123456789abcdef0 ; eight byte constant
1228 \c dq 1.234567e20 ; double-precision float
1229 \c dt 1.234567e20 ; extended-precision float
1231 \c{DT}, \c{DO} and \c{DY} do not accept \i{numeric constants} as operands.
1234 \S{resb} \c{RESB} and Friends: Declaring \i{Uninitialized} Data
1236 \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW}, \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO}
1237 and \i\c{RESY} are designed to be used in the BSS section of a module:
1238 they declare \e{uninitialized} storage space. Each takes a single
1239 operand, which is the number of bytes, words, doublewords or whatever
1240 to reserve. As stated in \k{qsother}, NASM does not support the
1241 MASM/TASM syntax of reserving uninitialized space by writing
1242 \I\c{?}\c{DW ?} or similar things: this is what it does instead. The
1243 operand to a \c{RESB}-type pseudo-instruction is a \i\e{critical
1244 expression}: see \k{crit}.
1248 \c buffer: resb 64 ; reserve 64 bytes
1249 \c wordvar: resw 1 ; reserve a word
1250 \c realarray resq 10 ; array of ten reals
1251 \c ymmval: resy 1 ; one YMM register
1253 \S{incbin} \i\c{INCBIN}: Including External \i{Binary Files}
1255 \c{INCBIN} is borrowed from the old Amiga assembler \i{DevPac}: it
1256 includes a binary file verbatim into the output file. This can be
1257 handy for (for example) including \i{graphics} and \i{sound} data
1258 directly into a game executable file. It can be called in one of
1261 \c incbin "file.dat" ; include the whole file
1262 \c incbin "file.dat",1024 ; skip the first 1024 bytes
1263 \c incbin "file.dat",1024,512 ; skip the first 1024, and
1264 \c ; actually include at most 512
1266 \c{INCBIN} is both a directive and a standard macro; the standard
1267 macro version searches for the file in the include file search path
1268 and adds the file to the dependency lists. This macro can be
1269 overridden if desired.
1272 \S{equ} \i\c{EQU}: Defining Constants
1274 \c{EQU} defines a symbol to a given constant value: when \c{EQU} is
1275 used, the source line must contain a label. The action of \c{EQU} is
1276 to define the given label name to the value of its (only) operand.
1277 This definition is absolute, and cannot change later. So, for
1280 \c message db 'hello, world'
1281 \c msglen equ $-message
1283 defines \c{msglen} to be the constant 12. \c{msglen} may not then be
1284 redefined later. This is not a \i{preprocessor} definition either:
1285 the value of \c{msglen} is evaluated \e{once}, using the value of
1286 \c{$} (see \k{expr} for an explanation of \c{$}) at the point of
1287 definition, rather than being evaluated wherever it is referenced
1288 and using the value of \c{$} at the point of reference.
1291 \S{times} \i\c{TIMES}: \i{Repeating} Instructions or Data
1293 The \c{TIMES} prefix causes the instruction to be assembled multiple
1294 times. This is partly present as NASM's equivalent of the \i\c{DUP}
1295 syntax supported by \i{MASM}-compatible assemblers, in that you can
1298 \c zerobuf: times 64 db 0
1300 or similar things; but \c{TIMES} is more versatile than that. The
1301 argument to \c{TIMES} is not just a numeric constant, but a numeric
1302 \e{expression}, so you can do things like
1304 \c buffer: db 'hello, world'
1305 \c times 64-$+buffer db ' '
1307 which will store exactly enough spaces to make the total length of
1308 \c{buffer} up to 64. Finally, \c{TIMES} can be applied to ordinary
1309 instructions, so you can code trivial \i{unrolled loops} in it:
1313 Note that there is no effective difference between \c{times 100 resb
1314 1} and \c{resb 100}, except that the latter will be assembled about
1315 100 times faster due to the internal structure of the assembler.
1317 The operand to \c{TIMES} is a critical expression (\k{crit}).
1319 Note also that \c{TIMES} can't be applied to \i{macros}: the reason
1320 for this is that \c{TIMES} is processed after the macro phase, which
1321 allows the argument to \c{TIMES} to contain expressions such as
1322 \c{64-$+buffer} as above. To repeat more than one line of code, or a
1323 complex macro, use the preprocessor \i\c{%rep} directive.
1326 \H{effaddr} Effective Addresses
1328 An \i{effective address} is any operand to an instruction which
1329 \I{memory reference}references memory. Effective addresses, in NASM,
1330 have a very simple syntax: they consist of an expression evaluating
1331 to the desired address, enclosed in \i{square brackets}. For
1336 \c mov ax,[wordvar+1]
1337 \c mov ax,[es:wordvar+bx]
1339 Anything not conforming to this simple system is not a valid memory
1340 reference in NASM, for example \c{es:wordvar[bx]}.
1342 More complicated effective addresses, such as those involving more
1343 than one register, work in exactly the same way:
1345 \c mov eax,[ebx*2+ecx+offset]
1348 NASM is capable of doing \i{algebra} on these effective addresses,
1349 so that things which don't necessarily \e{look} legal are perfectly
1352 \c mov eax,[ebx*5] ; assembles as [ebx*4+ebx]
1353 \c mov eax,[label1*2-label2] ; ie [label1+(label1-label2)]
1355 Some forms of effective address have more than one assembled form;
1356 in most such cases NASM will generate the smallest form it can. For
1357 example, there are distinct assembled forms for the 32-bit effective
1358 addresses \c{[eax*2+0]} and \c{[eax+eax]}, and NASM will generally
1359 generate the latter on the grounds that the former requires four
1360 bytes to store a zero offset.
1362 NASM has a hinting mechanism which will cause \c{[eax+ebx]} and
1363 \c{[ebx+eax]} to generate different opcodes; this is occasionally
1364 useful because \c{[esi+ebp]} and \c{[ebp+esi]} have different
1365 default segment registers.
1367 However, you can force NASM to generate an effective address in a
1368 particular form by the use of the keywords \c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1369 \c{DWORD} and \c{NOSPLIT}. If you need \c{[eax+3]} to be assembled
1370 using a double-word offset field instead of the one byte NASM will
1371 normally generate, you can code \c{[dword eax+3]}. Similarly, you
1372 can force NASM to use a byte offset for a small value which it
1373 hasn't seen on the first pass (see \k{crit} for an example of such a
1374 code fragment) by using \c{[byte eax+offset]}. As special cases,
1375 \c{[byte eax]} will code \c{[eax+0]} with a byte offset of zero, and
1376 \c{[dword eax]} will code it with a double-word offset of zero. The
1377 normal form, \c{[eax]}, will be coded with no offset field.
1379 The form described in the previous paragraph is also useful if you
1380 are trying to access data in a 32-bit segment from within 16 bit code.
1381 For more information on this see the section on mixed-size addressing
1382 (\k{mixaddr}). In particular, if you need to access data with a known
1383 offset that is larger than will fit in a 16-bit value, if you don't
1384 specify that it is a dword offset, nasm will cause the high word of
1385 the offset to be lost.
1387 Similarly, NASM will split \c{[eax*2]} into \c{[eax+eax]} because
1388 that allows the offset field to be absent and space to be saved; in
1389 fact, it will also split \c{[eax*2+offset]} into
1390 \c{[eax+eax+offset]}. You can combat this behaviour by the use of
1391 the \c{NOSPLIT} keyword: \c{[nosplit eax*2]} will force
1392 \c{[eax*2+0]} to be generated literally.
1394 In 64-bit mode, NASM will by default generate absolute addresses. The
1395 \i\c{REL} keyword makes it produce \c{RIP}-relative addresses. Since
1396 this is frequently the normally desired behaviour, see the \c{DEFAULT}
1397 directive (\k{default}). The keyword \i\c{ABS} overrides \i\c{REL}.
1400 \H{const} \i{Constants}
1402 NASM understands four different types of constant: numeric,
1403 character, string and floating-point.
1406 \S{numconst} \i{Numeric Constants}
1408 A numeric constant is simply a number. NASM allows you to specify
1409 numbers in a variety of number bases, in a variety of ways: you can
1410 suffix \c{H} or \c{X}, \c{Q} or \c{O}, and \c{B} for \i{hexadecimal},
1411 \i{octal} and \i{binary} respectively, or you can prefix \c{0x} for
1412 hexadecimal in the style of C, or you can prefix \c{$} for hexadecimal
1413 in the style of Borland Pascal. Note, though, that the \I{$,
1414 prefix}\c{$} prefix does double duty as a prefix on identifiers (see
1415 \k{syntax}), so a hex number prefixed with a \c{$} sign must have a
1416 digit after the \c{$} rather than a letter. In addition, current
1417 versions of NASM accept the prefix \c{0h} for hexadecimal, \c{0o} or
1418 \c{0q} for octal, and \c{0b} for binary. Please note that unlike C, a
1419 \c{0} prefix by itself does \e{not} imply an octal constant!
1421 Numeric constants can have underscores (\c{_}) interspersed to break
1424 Some examples (all producing exactly the same code):
1426 \c mov ax,200 ; decimal
1427 \c mov ax,0200 ; still decimal
1428 \c mov ax,0200d ; explicitly decimal
1429 \c mov ax,0d200 ; also decimal
1430 \c mov ax,0c8h ; hex
1431 \c mov ax,$0c8 ; hex again: the 0 is required
1432 \c mov ax,0xc8 ; hex yet again
1433 \c mov ax,0hc8 ; still hex
1434 \c mov ax,310q ; octal
1435 \c mov ax,310o ; octal again
1436 \c mov ax,0o310 ; octal yet again
1437 \c mov ax,0q310 ; hex yet again
1438 \c mov ax,11001000b ; binary
1439 \c mov ax,1100_1000b ; same binary constant
1440 \c mov ax,0b1100_1000 ; same binary constant yet again
1442 \S{strings} \I{Strings}\i{Character Strings}
1444 A character string consists of up to eight characters enclosed in
1445 either single quotes (\c{'...'}), double quotes (\c{"..."}) or
1446 backquotes (\c{`...`}). Single or double quotes are equivalent to
1447 NASM (except of course that surrounding the constant with single
1448 quotes allows double quotes to appear within it and vice versa); the
1449 contents of those are represented verbatim. Strings enclosed in
1450 backquotes support C-style \c{\\}-escapes for special characters.
1453 The following \i{escape sequences} are recognized by backquoted strings:
1455 \c \' single quote (')
1456 \c \" double quote (")
1458 \c \\\ backslash (\)
1459 \c \? question mark (?)
1467 \c \e ESC (ASCII 27)
1468 \c \377 Up to 3 octal digits - literal byte
1469 \c \xFF Up to 2 hexadecimal digits - literal byte
1470 \c \u1234 4 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1471 \c \U12345678 8 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1473 All other escape sequences are reserved. Note that \c{\\0}, meaning a
1474 \c{NUL} character (ASCII 0), is a special case of the octal escape
1477 \i{Unicode} characters specified with \c{\\u} or \c{\\U} are converted to
1478 \i{UTF-8}. For example, the following lines are all equivalent:
1480 \c db `\u263a` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1481 \c db `\xe2\x98\xba` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1482 \c db 0E2h, 098h, 0BAh ; UTF-8 smiley face
1485 \S{chrconst} \i{Character Constants}
1487 A character constant consists of a string up to eight bytes long, used
1488 in an expression context. It is treated as if it was an integer.
1490 A character constant with more than one byte will be arranged
1491 with \i{little-endian} order in mind: if you code
1495 then the constant generated is not \c{0x61626364}, but
1496 \c{0x64636261}, so that if you were then to store the value into
1497 memory, it would read \c{abcd} rather than \c{dcba}. This is also
1498 the sense of character constants understood by the Pentium's
1499 \i\c{CPUID} instruction.
1502 \S{strconst} \i{String Constants}
1504 String constants are character strings used in the context of some
1505 pseudo-instructions, namely the
1506 \I\c{DW}\I\c{DD}\I\c{DQ}\I\c{DT}\I\c{DO}\I\c{DY}\i\c{DB} family and
1507 \i\c{INCBIN} (where it represents a filename.) They are also used in
1508 certain preprocessor directives.
1510 A string constant looks like a character constant, only longer. It
1511 is treated as a concatenation of maximum-size character constants
1512 for the conditions. So the following are equivalent:
1514 \c db 'hello' ; string constant
1515 \c db 'h','e','l','l','o' ; equivalent character constants
1517 And the following are also equivalent:
1519 \c dd 'ninechars' ; doubleword string constant
1520 \c dd 'nine','char','s' ; becomes three doublewords
1521 \c db 'ninechars',0,0,0 ; and really looks like this
1523 Note that when used in a string-supporting context, quoted strings are
1524 treated as a string constants even if they are short enough to be a
1525 character constant, because otherwise \c{db 'ab'} would have the same
1526 effect as \c{db 'a'}, which would be silly. Similarly, three-character
1527 or four-character constants are treated as strings when they are
1528 operands to \c{DW}, and so forth.
1530 \S{unicode} \I{UTF-16}\I{UTF-32}\i{Unicode} Strings
1532 The special operators \i\c{__utf16__} and \i\c{__utf32__} allows
1533 definition of Unicode strings. They take a string in UTF-8 format and
1534 converts it to (littleendian) UTF-16 or UTF-32, respectively.
1538 \c %define u(x) __utf16__(x)
1539 \c %define w(x) __utf32__(x)
1541 \c dw u('C:\WINDOWS'), 0 ; Pathname in UTF-16
1542 \c dd w(`A + B = \u206a`), 0 ; String in UTF-32
1544 \c{__utf16__} and \c{__utf32__} can be applied either to strings
1545 passed to the \c{DB} family instructions, or to character constants in
1546 an expression context.
1548 \S{fltconst} \I{floating-point, constants}Floating-Point Constants
1550 \i{Floating-point} constants are acceptable only as arguments to
1551 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, and \i\c{DO}, or as
1552 arguments to the special operators \i\c{__float8__},
1553 \i\c{__float16__}, \i\c{__float32__}, \i\c{__float64__},
1554 \i\c{__float80m__}, \i\c{__float80e__}, \i\c{__float128l__}, and
1555 \i\c{__float128h__}.
1557 Floating-point constants are expressed in the traditional form:
1558 digits, then a period, then optionally more digits, then optionally an
1559 \c{E} followed by an exponent. The period is mandatory, so that NASM
1560 can distinguish between \c{dd 1}, which declares an integer constant,
1561 and \c{dd 1.0} which declares a floating-point constant. NASM also
1562 support C99-style hexadecimal floating-point: \c{0x}, hexadecimal
1563 digits, period, optionally more hexadeximal digits, then optionally a
1564 \c{P} followed by a \e{binary} (not hexadecimal) exponent in decimal
1567 Underscores to break up groups of digits are permitted in
1568 floating-point constants as well.
1572 \c db -0.2 ; "Quarter precision"
1573 \c dw -0.5 ; IEEE 754r/SSE5 half precision
1574 \c dd 1.2 ; an easy one
1575 \c dd 1.222_222_222 ; underscores are permitted
1576 \c dd 0x1p+2 ; 1.0x2^2 = 4.0
1577 \c dq 0x1p+32 ; 1.0x2^32 = 4 294 967 296.0
1578 \c dq 1.e10 ; 10 000 000 000.0
1579 \c dq 1.e+10 ; synonymous with 1.e10
1580 \c dq 1.e-10 ; 0.000 000 000 1
1581 \c dt 3.141592653589793238462 ; pi
1582 \c do 1.e+4000 ; IEEE 754r quad precision
1584 The 8-bit "quarter-precision" floating-point format is
1585 sign:exponent:mantissa = 1:4:3 with an exponent bias of 7. This
1586 appears to be the most frequently used 8-bit floating-point format,
1587 although it is not covered by any formal standard. This is sometimes
1588 called a "\i{minifloat}."
1590 The special operators are used to produce floating-point numbers in
1591 other contexts. They produce the binary representation of a specific
1592 floating-point number as an integer, and can use anywhere integer
1593 constants are used in an expression. \c{__float80m__} and
1594 \c{__float80e__} produce the 64-bit mantissa and 16-bit exponent of an
1595 80-bit floating-point number, and \c{__float128l__} and
1596 \c{__float128h__} produce the lower and upper 64-bit halves of a 128-bit
1597 floating-point number, respectively.
1601 \c mov rax,__float64__(3.141592653589793238462)
1603 ... would assign the binary representation of pi as a 64-bit floating
1604 point number into \c{RAX}. This is exactly equivalent to:
1606 \c mov rax,0x400921fb54442d18
1608 NASM cannot do compile-time arithmetic on floating-point constants.
1609 This is because NASM is designed to be portable - although it always
1610 generates code to run on x86 processors, the assembler itself can
1611 run on any system with an ANSI C compiler. Therefore, the assembler
1612 cannot guarantee the presence of a floating-point unit capable of
1613 handling the \i{Intel number formats}, and so for NASM to be able to
1614 do floating arithmetic it would have to include its own complete set
1615 of floating-point routines, which would significantly increase the
1616 size of the assembler for very little benefit.
1618 The special tokens \i\c{__Infinity__}, \i\c{__QNaN__} (or
1619 \i\c{__NaN__}) and \i\c{__SNaN__} can be used to generate
1620 \I{infinity}infinities, quiet \i{NaN}s, and signalling NaNs,
1621 respectively. These are normally used as macros:
1623 \c %define Inf __Infinity__
1624 \c %define NaN __QNaN__
1626 \c dq +1.5, -Inf, NaN ; Double-precision constants
1628 \S{bcdconst} \I{floating-point, packed BCD constants}Packed BCD Constants
1630 x87-style packed BCD constants can be used in the same contexts as
1631 80-bit floating-point numbers. They are suffixed with \c{p} or
1632 prefixed with \c{0p}, and can include up to 18 decimal digits.
1634 As with other numeric constants, underscores can be used to separate
1639 \c dt 12_345_678_901_245_678p
1640 \c dt -12_345_678_901_245_678p
1645 \H{expr} \i{Expressions}
1647 Expressions in NASM are similar in syntax to those in C. Expressions
1648 are evaluated as 64-bit integers which are then adjusted to the
1651 NASM supports two special tokens in expressions, allowing
1652 calculations to involve the current assembly position: the
1653 \I{$, here}\c{$} and \i\c{$$} tokens. \c{$} evaluates to the assembly
1654 position at the beginning of the line containing the expression; so
1655 you can code an \i{infinite loop} using \c{JMP $}. \c{$$} evaluates
1656 to the beginning of the current section; so you can tell how far
1657 into the section you are by using \c{($-$$)}.
1659 The arithmetic \i{operators} provided by NASM are listed here, in
1660 increasing order of \i{precedence}.
1663 \S{expor} \i\c{|}: \i{Bitwise OR} Operator
1665 The \c{|} operator gives a bitwise OR, exactly as performed by the
1666 \c{OR} machine instruction. Bitwise OR is the lowest-priority
1667 arithmetic operator supported by NASM.
1670 \S{expxor} \i\c{^}: \i{Bitwise XOR} Operator
1672 \c{^} provides the bitwise XOR operation.
1675 \S{expand} \i\c{&}: \i{Bitwise AND} Operator
1677 \c{&} provides the bitwise AND operation.
1680 \S{expshift} \i\c{<<} and \i\c{>>}: \i{Bit Shift} Operators
1682 \c{<<} gives a bit-shift to the left, just as it does in C. So \c{5<<3}
1683 evaluates to 5 times 8, or 40. \c{>>} gives a bit-shift to the
1684 right; in NASM, such a shift is \e{always} unsigned, so that
1685 the bits shifted in from the left-hand end are filled with zero
1686 rather than a sign-extension of the previous highest bit.
1689 \S{expplmi} \I{+ opaddition}\c{+} and \I{- opsubtraction}\c{-}:
1690 \i{Addition} and \i{Subtraction} Operators
1692 The \c{+} and \c{-} operators do perfectly ordinary addition and
1696 \S{expmul} \i\c{*}, \i\c{/}, \i\c{//}, \i\c{%} and \i\c{%%}:
1697 \i{Multiplication} and \i{Division}
1699 \c{*} is the multiplication operator. \c{/} and \c{//} are both
1700 division operators: \c{/} is \i{unsigned division} and \c{//} is
1701 \i{signed division}. Similarly, \c{%} and \c{%%} provide \I{unsigned
1702 modulo}\I{modulo operators}unsigned and
1703 \i{signed modulo} operators respectively.
1705 NASM, like ANSI C, provides no guarantees about the sensible
1706 operation of the signed modulo operator.
1708 Since the \c{%} character is used extensively by the macro
1709 \i{preprocessor}, you should ensure that both the signed and unsigned
1710 modulo operators are followed by white space wherever they appear.
1713 \S{expmul} \i{Unary Operators}: \I{+ opunary}\c{+}, \I{- opunary}\c{-},
1714 \i\c{~}, \I{! opunary}\c{!} and \i\c{SEG}
1716 The highest-priority operators in NASM's expression grammar are
1717 those which only apply to one argument. \c{-} negates its operand,
1718 \c{+} does nothing (it's provided for symmetry with \c{-}), \c{~}
1719 computes the \i{one's complement} of its operand, \c{!} is the
1720 \i{logical negation} operator, and \c{SEG} provides the \i{segment address}
1721 of its operand (explained in more detail in \k{segwrt}).
1724 \H{segwrt} \i\c{SEG} and \i\c{WRT}
1726 When writing large 16-bit programs, which must be split into
1727 multiple \i{segments}, it is often necessary to be able to refer to
1728 the \I{segment address}segment part of the address of a symbol. NASM
1729 supports the \c{SEG} operator to perform this function.
1731 The \c{SEG} operator returns the \i\e{preferred} segment base of a
1732 symbol, defined as the segment base relative to which the offset of
1733 the symbol makes sense. So the code
1735 \c mov ax,seg symbol
1739 will load \c{ES:BX} with a valid pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1741 Things can be more complex than this: since 16-bit segments and
1742 \i{groups} may \I{overlapping segments}overlap, you might occasionally
1743 want to refer to some symbol using a different segment base from the
1744 preferred one. NASM lets you do this, by the use of the \c{WRT}
1745 (With Reference To) keyword. So you can do things like
1747 \c mov ax,weird_seg ; weird_seg is a segment base
1749 \c mov bx,symbol wrt weird_seg
1751 to load \c{ES:BX} with a different, but functionally equivalent,
1752 pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1754 NASM supports far (inter-segment) calls and jumps by means of the
1755 syntax \c{call segment:offset}, where \c{segment} and \c{offset}
1756 both represent immediate values. So to call a far procedure, you
1757 could code either of
1759 \c call (seg procedure):procedure
1760 \c call weird_seg:(procedure wrt weird_seg)
1762 (The parentheses are included for clarity, to show the intended
1763 parsing of the above instructions. They are not necessary in
1766 NASM supports the syntax \I\c{CALL FAR}\c{call far procedure} as a
1767 synonym for the first of the above usages. \c{JMP} works identically
1768 to \c{CALL} in these examples.
1770 To declare a \i{far pointer} to a data item in a data segment, you
1773 \c dw symbol, seg symbol
1775 NASM supports no convenient synonym for this, though you can always
1776 invent one using the macro processor.
1779 \H{strict} \i\c{STRICT}: Inhibiting Optimization
1781 When assembling with the optimizer set to level 2 or higher (see
1782 \k{opt-O}), NASM will use size specifiers (\c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1783 \c{DWORD}, \c{QWORD}, \c{TWORD}, \c{OWORD} or \c{YWORD}), but will
1784 give them the smallest possible size. The keyword \c{STRICT} can be
1785 used to inhibit optimization and force a particular operand to be
1786 emitted in the specified size. For example, with the optimizer on, and
1787 in \c{BITS 16} mode,
1791 is encoded in three bytes \c{66 6A 21}, whereas
1793 \c push strict dword 33
1795 is encoded in six bytes, with a full dword immediate operand \c{66 68
1798 With the optimizer off, the same code (six bytes) is generated whether
1799 the \c{STRICT} keyword was used or not.
1802 \H{crit} \i{Critical Expressions}
1804 Although NASM has an optional multi-pass optimizer, there are some
1805 expressions which must be resolvable on the first pass. These are
1806 called \e{Critical Expressions}.
1808 The first pass is used to determine the size of all the assembled
1809 code and data, so that the second pass, when generating all the
1810 code, knows all the symbol addresses the code refers to. So one
1811 thing NASM can't handle is code whose size depends on the value of a
1812 symbol declared after the code in question. For example,
1814 \c times (label-$) db 0
1815 \c label: db 'Where am I?'
1817 The argument to \i\c{TIMES} in this case could equally legally
1818 evaluate to anything at all; NASM will reject this example because
1819 it cannot tell the size of the \c{TIMES} line when it first sees it.
1820 It will just as firmly reject the slightly \I{paradox}paradoxical
1823 \c times (label-$+1) db 0
1824 \c label: db 'NOW where am I?'
1826 in which \e{any} value for the \c{TIMES} argument is by definition
1829 NASM rejects these examples by means of a concept called a
1830 \e{critical expression}, which is defined to be an expression whose
1831 value is required to be computable in the first pass, and which must
1832 therefore depend only on symbols defined before it. The argument to
1833 the \c{TIMES} prefix is a critical expression.
1835 \H{locallab} \i{Local Labels}
1837 NASM gives special treatment to symbols beginning with a \i{period}.
1838 A label beginning with a single period is treated as a \e{local}
1839 label, which means that it is associated with the previous non-local
1840 label. So, for example:
1842 \c label1 ; some code
1850 \c label2 ; some code
1858 In the above code fragment, each \c{JNE} instruction jumps to the
1859 line immediately before it, because the two definitions of \c{.loop}
1860 are kept separate by virtue of each being associated with the
1861 previous non-local label.
1863 This form of local label handling is borrowed from the old Amiga
1864 assembler \i{DevPac}; however, NASM goes one step further, in
1865 allowing access to local labels from other parts of the code. This
1866 is achieved by means of \e{defining} a local label in terms of the
1867 previous non-local label: the first definition of \c{.loop} above is
1868 really defining a symbol called \c{label1.loop}, and the second
1869 defines a symbol called \c{label2.loop}. So, if you really needed
1872 \c label3 ; some more code
1877 Sometimes it is useful - in a macro, for instance - to be able to
1878 define a label which can be referenced from anywhere but which
1879 doesn't interfere with the normal local-label mechanism. Such a
1880 label can't be non-local because it would interfere with subsequent
1881 definitions of, and references to, local labels; and it can't be
1882 local because the macro that defined it wouldn't know the label's
1883 full name. NASM therefore introduces a third type of label, which is
1884 probably only useful in macro definitions: if a label begins with
1885 the \I{label prefix}special prefix \i\c{..@}, then it does nothing
1886 to the local label mechanism. So you could code
1888 \c label1: ; a non-local label
1889 \c .local: ; this is really label1.local
1890 \c ..@foo: ; this is a special symbol
1891 \c label2: ; another non-local label
1892 \c .local: ; this is really label2.local
1894 \c jmp ..@foo ; this will jump three lines up
1896 NASM has the capacity to define other special symbols beginning with
1897 a double period: for example, \c{..start} is used to specify the
1898 entry point in the \c{obj} output format (see \k{dotdotstart}).
1901 \C{preproc} The NASM \i{Preprocessor}
1903 NASM contains a powerful \i{macro processor}, which supports
1904 conditional assembly, multi-level file inclusion, two forms of macro
1905 (single-line and multi-line), and a `context stack' mechanism for
1906 extra macro power. Preprocessor directives all begin with a \c{%}
1909 The preprocessor collapses all lines which end with a backslash (\\)
1910 character into a single line. Thus:
1912 \c %define THIS_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME_IS_DEFINED_TO \\
1915 will work like a single-line macro without the backslash-newline
1918 \H{slmacro} \i{Single-Line Macros}
1920 \S{define} The Normal Way: \I\c{%idefine}\i\c{%define}
1922 Single-line macros are defined using the \c{%define} preprocessor
1923 directive. The definitions work in a similar way to C; so you can do
1926 \c %define ctrl 0x1F &
1927 \c %define param(a,b) ((a)+(a)*(b))
1929 \c mov byte [param(2,ebx)], ctrl 'D'
1931 which will expand to
1933 \c mov byte [(2)+(2)*(ebx)], 0x1F & 'D'
1935 When the expansion of a single-line macro contains tokens which
1936 invoke another macro, the expansion is performed at invocation time,
1937 not at definition time. Thus the code
1939 \c %define a(x) 1+b(x)
1944 will evaluate in the expected way to \c{mov ax,1+2*8}, even though
1945 the macro \c{b} wasn't defined at the time of definition of \c{a}.
1947 Macros defined with \c{%define} are \i{case sensitive}: after
1948 \c{%define foo bar}, only \c{foo} will expand to \c{bar}: \c{Foo} or
1949 \c{FOO} will not. By using \c{%idefine} instead of \c{%define} (the
1950 `i' stands for `insensitive') you can define all the case variants
1951 of a macro at once, so that \c{%idefine foo bar} would cause
1952 \c{foo}, \c{Foo}, \c{FOO}, \c{fOO} and so on all to expand to
1955 There is a mechanism which detects when a macro call has occurred as
1956 a result of a previous expansion of the same macro, to guard against
1957 \i{circular references} and infinite loops. If this happens, the
1958 preprocessor will only expand the first occurrence of the macro.
1961 \c %define a(x) 1+a(x)
1965 the macro \c{a(3)} will expand once, becoming \c{1+a(3)}, and will
1966 then expand no further. This behaviour can be useful: see \k{32c}
1967 for an example of its use.
1969 You can \I{overloading, single-line macros}overload single-line
1970 macros: if you write
1972 \c %define foo(x) 1+x
1973 \c %define foo(x,y) 1+x*y
1975 the preprocessor will be able to handle both types of macro call,
1976 by counting the parameters you pass; so \c{foo(3)} will become
1977 \c{1+3} whereas \c{foo(ebx,2)} will become \c{1+ebx*2}. However, if
1982 then no other definition of \c{foo} will be accepted: a macro with
1983 no parameters prohibits the definition of the same name as a macro
1984 \e{with} parameters, and vice versa.
1986 This doesn't prevent single-line macros being \e{redefined}: you can
1987 perfectly well define a macro with
1991 and then re-define it later in the same source file with
1995 Then everywhere the macro \c{foo} is invoked, it will be expanded
1996 according to the most recent definition. This is particularly useful
1997 when defining single-line macros with \c{%assign} (see \k{assign}).
1999 You can \i{pre-define} single-line macros using the `-d' option on
2000 the NASM command line: see \k{opt-d}.
2003 \S{xdefine} Resolving \c{%define}: \I\c{%ixdefine}\i\c{%xdefine}
2005 To have a reference to an embedded single-line macro resolved at the
2006 time that the embedding macro is \e{defined}, as opposed to when the
2007 embedding macro is \e{expanded}, you need a different mechanism to the
2008 one offered by \c{%define}. The solution is to use \c{%xdefine}, or
2009 it's \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ixdefine}.
2011 Suppose you have the following code:
2014 \c %define isFalse isTrue
2023 In this case, \c{val1} is equal to 0, and \c{val2} is equal to 1.
2024 This is because, when a single-line macro is defined using
2025 \c{%define}, it is expanded only when it is called. As \c{isFalse}
2026 expands to \c{isTrue}, the expansion will be the current value of
2027 \c{isTrue}. The first time it is called that is 0, and the second
2030 If you wanted \c{isFalse} to expand to the value assigned to the
2031 embedded macro \c{isTrue} at the time that \c{isFalse} was defined,
2032 you need to change the above code to use \c{%xdefine}.
2034 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2035 \c %xdefine isFalse isTrue
2036 \c %xdefine isTrue 0
2040 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2044 Now, each time that \c{isFalse} is called, it expands to 1,
2045 as that is what the embedded macro \c{isTrue} expanded to at
2046 the time that \c{isFalse} was defined.
2049 \S{indmacro} \i{Macro Indirection}: \I\c{%[}\c{%[...]}
2051 The \c{%[...]} construct can be used to expand macros in contexts
2052 where macro expansion would otherwise not occur, including in the
2053 names other macros. For example, if you have a set of macros named
2054 \c{Foo16}, \c{Foo32} and \c{Foo64}, you could write:
2056 \c mov ax,Foo%[__BITS__] ; The Foo value
2058 to use the builtin macro \c{__BITS__} (see \k{bitsm}) to automatically
2059 select between them. Similarly, the two statements:
2061 \c %xdefine Bar Quux ; Expands due to %xdefine
2062 \c %define Bar %[Quux] ; Expands due to %[...]
2064 have, in fact, exactly the same effect.
2066 \c{%[...]} concatenates to adjacent tokens in the same way that
2067 multi-line macro parameters do, see \k{concat} for details.
2070 \S{concat%+} Concatenating Single Line Macro Tokens: \i\c{%+}
2072 Individual tokens in single line macros can be concatenated, to produce
2073 longer tokens for later processing. This can be useful if there are
2074 several similar macros that perform similar functions.
2076 Please note that a space is required after \c{%+}, in order to
2077 disambiguate it from the syntax \c{%+1} used in multiline macros.
2079 As an example, consider the following:
2081 \c %define BDASTART 400h ; Start of BIOS data area
2083 \c struc tBIOSDA ; its structure
2089 Now, if we need to access the elements of tBIOSDA in different places,
2092 \c mov ax,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM1addr
2093 \c mov bx,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM2addr
2095 This will become pretty ugly (and tedious) if used in many places, and
2096 can be reduced in size significantly by using the following macro:
2098 \c ; Macro to access BIOS variables by their names (from tBDA):
2100 \c %define BDA(x) BDASTART + tBIOSDA. %+ x
2102 Now the above code can be written as:
2104 \c mov ax,BDA(COM1addr)
2105 \c mov bx,BDA(COM2addr)
2107 Using this feature, we can simplify references to a lot of macros (and,
2108 in turn, reduce typing errors).
2111 \S{selfref%?} The Macro Name Itself: \i\c{%?} and \i\c{%??}
2113 The special symbols \c{%?} and \c{%??} can be used to reference the
2114 macro name itself inside a macro expansion, this is supported for both
2115 single-and multi-line macros. \c{%?} refers to the macro name as
2116 \e{invoked}, whereas \c{%??} refers to the macro name as
2117 \e{declared}. The two are always the same for case-sensitive
2118 macros, but for case-insensitive macros, they can differ.
2122 \c %idefine Foo mov %?,%??
2134 \c %idefine keyword $%?
2136 can be used to make a keyword "disappear", for example in case a new
2137 instruction has been used as a label in older code. For example:
2139 \c %idefine pause $%? ; Hide the PAUSE instruction
2142 \S{undef} Undefining Single-Line Macros: \i\c{%undef}
2144 Single-line macros can be removed with the \c{%undef} directive. For
2145 example, the following sequence:
2152 will expand to the instruction \c{mov eax, foo}, since after
2153 \c{%undef} the macro \c{foo} is no longer defined.
2155 Macros that would otherwise be pre-defined can be undefined on the
2156 command-line using the `-u' option on the NASM command line: see
2160 \S{assign} \i{Preprocessor Variables}: \i\c{%assign}
2162 An alternative way to define single-line macros is by means of the
2163 \c{%assign} command (and its \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive
2164 counterpart \i\c{%iassign}, which differs from \c{%assign} in
2165 exactly the same way that \c{%idefine} differs from \c{%define}).
2167 \c{%assign} is used to define single-line macros which take no
2168 parameters and have a numeric value. This value can be specified in
2169 the form of an expression, and it will be evaluated once, when the
2170 \c{%assign} directive is processed.
2172 Like \c{%define}, macros defined using \c{%assign} can be re-defined
2173 later, so you can do things like
2177 to increment the numeric value of a macro.
2179 \c{%assign} is useful for controlling the termination of \c{%rep}
2180 preprocessor loops: see \k{rep} for an example of this. Another
2181 use for \c{%assign} is given in \k{16c} and \k{32c}.
2183 The expression passed to \c{%assign} is a \i{critical expression}
2184 (see \k{crit}), and must also evaluate to a pure number (rather than
2185 a relocatable reference such as a code or data address, or anything
2186 involving a register).
2189 \S{defstr} Defining Strings: \I\c{%idefstr}\i\c{%defstr}
2191 \c{%defstr}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%idefstr}, define
2192 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2193 entire right-hand side, after macro expansion, to a quoted string
2198 \c %defstr test TEST
2202 \c %define test 'TEST'
2204 This can be used, for example, with the \c{%!} construct (see
2207 \c %defstr PATH %!PATH ; The operating system PATH variable
2210 \H{strlen} \i{String Manipulation in Macros}
2212 It's often useful to be able to handle strings in macros. NASM
2213 supports a few simple string handling macro operators from which
2214 more complex operations can be constructed.
2216 All the string operators define or redefine a value (either a string
2217 or a numeric value) to a single-line macro. When producing a string
2218 value, it may change the style of quoting of the input string or
2219 strings, and possibly use \c{\\}-escapes inside \c{`}-quoted strings.
2221 \S{strcat} \i{Concatenating Strings}: \i\c{%strcat}
2223 The \c{%strcat} operator concatenates quoted strings and assign them to
2224 a single-line macro.
2228 \c %strcat alpha "Alpha: ", '12" screen'
2230 ... would assign the value \c{'Alpha: 12" screen'} to \c{alpha}.
2233 \c %strcat beta '"foo"\', "'bar'"
2235 ... would assign the value \c{`"foo"\\'bar'`} to \c{beta}.
2237 The use of commas to separate strings is permitted but optional.
2240 \S{strlen} \i{String Length}: \i\c{%strlen}
2242 The \c{%strlen} operator assigns the length of a string to a macro.
2245 \c %strlen charcnt 'my string'
2247 In this example, \c{charcnt} would receive the value 9, just as
2248 if an \c{%assign} had been used. In this example, \c{'my string'}
2249 was a literal string but it could also have been a single-line
2250 macro that expands to a string, as in the following example:
2252 \c %define sometext 'my string'
2253 \c %strlen charcnt sometext
2255 As in the first case, this would result in \c{charcnt} being
2256 assigned the value of 9.
2259 \S{substr} \i{Extracting Substrings}: \i\c{%substr}
2261 Individual letters or substrings in strings can be extracted using the
2262 \c{%substr} operator. An example of its use is probably more useful
2263 than the description:
2265 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'x'
2266 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'y'
2267 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 3 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'z'
2268 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2269 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yzw'
2270 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2272 As with \c{%strlen} (see \k{strlen}), the first parameter is the
2273 single-line macro to be created and the second is the string. The
2274 third parameter specifies the first character to be selected, and the
2275 optional fourth parameter preceeded by comma) is the length. Note
2276 that the first index is 1, not 0 and the last index is equal to the
2277 value that \c{%strlen} would assign given the same string. Index
2278 values out of range result in an empty string. A negative length
2279 means "until N-1 characters before the end of string", i.e. \c{-1}
2280 means until end of string, \c{-2} until one character before, etc.
2283 \H{mlmacro} \i{Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%imacro}\i\c{%macro}
2285 Multi-line macros are much more like the type of macro seen in MASM
2286 and TASM: a multi-line macro definition in NASM looks something like
2289 \c %macro prologue 1
2297 This defines a C-like function prologue as a macro: so you would
2298 invoke the macro with a call such as
2300 \c myfunc: prologue 12
2302 which would expand to the three lines of code
2308 The number \c{1} after the macro name in the \c{%macro} line defines
2309 the number of parameters the macro \c{prologue} expects to receive.
2310 The use of \c{%1} inside the macro definition refers to the first
2311 parameter to the macro call. With a macro taking more than one
2312 parameter, subsequent parameters would be referred to as \c{%2},
2315 Multi-line macros, like single-line macros, are \i{case-sensitive},
2316 unless you define them using the alternative directive \c{%imacro}.
2318 If you need to pass a comma as \e{part} of a parameter to a
2319 multi-line macro, you can do that by enclosing the entire parameter
2320 in \I{braces, around macro parameters}braces. So you could code
2329 \c silly 'a', letter_a ; letter_a: db 'a'
2330 \c silly 'ab', string_ab ; string_ab: db 'ab'
2331 \c silly {13,10}, crlf ; crlf: db 13,10
2334 \S{mlmacover} Overloading Multi-Line Macros\I{overloading, multi-line macros}
2336 As with single-line macros, multi-line macros can be overloaded by
2337 defining the same macro name several times with different numbers of
2338 parameters. This time, no exception is made for macros with no
2339 parameters at all. So you could define
2341 \c %macro prologue 0
2348 to define an alternative form of the function prologue which
2349 allocates no local stack space.
2351 Sometimes, however, you might want to `overload' a machine
2352 instruction; for example, you might want to define
2361 so that you could code
2363 \c push ebx ; this line is not a macro call
2364 \c push eax,ecx ; but this one is
2366 Ordinarily, NASM will give a warning for the first of the above two
2367 lines, since \c{push} is now defined to be a macro, and is being
2368 invoked with a number of parameters for which no definition has been
2369 given. The correct code will still be generated, but the assembler
2370 will give a warning. This warning can be disabled by the use of the
2371 \c{-w-macro-params} command-line option (see \k{opt-w}).
2374 \S{maclocal} \i{Macro-Local Labels}
2376 NASM allows you to define labels within a multi-line macro
2377 definition in such a way as to make them local to the macro call: so
2378 calling the same macro multiple times will use a different label
2379 each time. You do this by prefixing \i\c{%%} to the label name. So
2380 you can invent an instruction which executes a \c{RET} if the \c{Z}
2381 flag is set by doing this:
2391 You can call this macro as many times as you want, and every time
2392 you call it NASM will make up a different `real' name to substitute
2393 for the label \c{%%skip}. The names NASM invents are of the form
2394 \c{..@2345.skip}, where the number 2345 changes with every macro
2395 call. The \i\c{..@} prefix prevents macro-local labels from
2396 interfering with the local label mechanism, as described in
2397 \k{locallab}. You should avoid defining your own labels in this form
2398 (the \c{..@} prefix, then a number, then another period) in case
2399 they interfere with macro-local labels.
2402 \S{mlmacgre} \i{Greedy Macro Parameters}
2404 Occasionally it is useful to define a macro which lumps its entire
2405 command line into one parameter definition, possibly after
2406 extracting one or two smaller parameters from the front. An example
2407 might be a macro to write a text string to a file in MS-DOS, where
2408 you might want to be able to write
2410 \c writefile [filehandle],"hello, world",13,10
2412 NASM allows you to define the last parameter of a macro to be
2413 \e{greedy}, meaning that if you invoke the macro with more
2414 parameters than it expects, all the spare parameters get lumped into
2415 the last defined one along with the separating commas. So if you
2418 \c %macro writefile 2+
2424 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
2431 then the example call to \c{writefile} above will work as expected:
2432 the text before the first comma, \c{[filehandle]}, is used as the
2433 first macro parameter and expanded when \c{%1} is referred to, and
2434 all the subsequent text is lumped into \c{%2} and placed after the
2437 The greedy nature of the macro is indicated to NASM by the use of
2438 the \I{+ modifier}\c{+} sign after the parameter count on the
2441 If you define a greedy macro, you are effectively telling NASM how
2442 it should expand the macro given \e{any} number of parameters from
2443 the actual number specified up to infinity; in this case, for
2444 example, NASM now knows what to do when it sees a call to
2445 \c{writefile} with 2, 3, 4 or more parameters. NASM will take this
2446 into account when overloading macros, and will not allow you to
2447 define another form of \c{writefile} taking 4 parameters (for
2450 Of course, the above macro could have been implemented as a
2451 non-greedy macro, in which case the call to it would have had to
2454 \c writefile [filehandle], {"hello, world",13,10}
2456 NASM provides both mechanisms for putting \i{commas in macro
2457 parameters}, and you choose which one you prefer for each macro
2460 See \k{sectmac} for a better way to write the above macro.
2463 \S{mlmacdef} \i{Default Macro Parameters}
2465 NASM also allows you to define a multi-line macro with a \e{range}
2466 of allowable parameter counts. If you do this, you can specify
2467 defaults for \i{omitted parameters}. So, for example:
2469 \c %macro die 0-1 "Painful program death has occurred."
2477 This macro (which makes use of the \c{writefile} macro defined in
2478 \k{mlmacgre}) can be called with an explicit error message, which it
2479 will display on the error output stream before exiting, or it can be
2480 called with no parameters, in which case it will use the default
2481 error message supplied in the macro definition.
2483 In general, you supply a minimum and maximum number of parameters
2484 for a macro of this type; the minimum number of parameters are then
2485 required in the macro call, and then you provide defaults for the
2486 optional ones. So if a macro definition began with the line
2488 \c %macro foobar 1-3 eax,[ebx+2]
2490 then it could be called with between one and three parameters, and
2491 \c{%1} would always be taken from the macro call. \c{%2}, if not
2492 specified by the macro call, would default to \c{eax}, and \c{%3} if
2493 not specified would default to \c{[ebx+2]}.
2495 You can provide extra information to a macro by providing
2496 too many default parameters:
2498 \c %macro quux 1 something
2500 This will trigger a warning by default; see \k{opt-w} for
2502 When \c{quux} is invoked, it receives not one but two parameters.
2503 \c{something} can be referred to as \c{%2}. The difference
2504 between passing \c{something} this way and writing \c{something}
2505 in the macro body is that with this way \c{something} is evaluated
2506 when the macro is defined, not when it is expanded.
2508 You may omit parameter defaults from the macro definition, in which
2509 case the parameter default is taken to be blank. This can be useful
2510 for macros which can take a variable number of parameters, since the
2511 \i\c{%0} token (see \k{percent0}) allows you to determine how many
2512 parameters were really passed to the macro call.
2514 This defaulting mechanism can be combined with the greedy-parameter
2515 mechanism; so the \c{die} macro above could be made more powerful,
2516 and more useful, by changing the first line of the definition to
2518 \c %macro die 0-1+ "Painful program death has occurred.",13,10
2520 The maximum parameter count can be infinite, denoted by \c{*}. In
2521 this case, of course, it is impossible to provide a \e{full} set of
2522 default parameters. Examples of this usage are shown in \k{rotate}.
2525 \S{percent0} \i\c{%0}: \I{counting macro parameters}Macro Parameter Counter
2527 The parameter reference \c{%0} will return a numeric constant giving the
2528 number of parameters received, that is, if \c{%0} is n then \c{%}n is the
2529 last parameter. \c{%0} is mostly useful for macros that can take a variable
2530 number of parameters. It can be used as an argument to \c{%rep}
2531 (see \k{rep}) in order to iterate through all the parameters of a macro.
2532 Examples are given in \k{rotate}.
2535 \S{rotate} \i\c{%rotate}: \i{Rotating Macro Parameters}
2537 Unix shell programmers will be familiar with the \I{shift
2538 command}\c{shift} shell command, which allows the arguments passed
2539 to a shell script (referenced as \c{$1}, \c{$2} and so on) to be
2540 moved left by one place, so that the argument previously referenced
2541 as \c{$2} becomes available as \c{$1}, and the argument previously
2542 referenced as \c{$1} is no longer available at all.
2544 NASM provides a similar mechanism, in the form of \c{%rotate}. As
2545 its name suggests, it differs from the Unix \c{shift} in that no
2546 parameters are lost: parameters rotated off the left end of the
2547 argument list reappear on the right, and vice versa.
2549 \c{%rotate} is invoked with a single numeric argument (which may be
2550 an expression). The macro parameters are rotated to the left by that
2551 many places. If the argument to \c{%rotate} is negative, the macro
2552 parameters are rotated to the right.
2554 \I{iterating over macro parameters}So a pair of macros to save and
2555 restore a set of registers might work as follows:
2557 \c %macro multipush 1-*
2566 This macro invokes the \c{PUSH} instruction on each of its arguments
2567 in turn, from left to right. It begins by pushing its first
2568 argument, \c{%1}, then invokes \c{%rotate} to move all the arguments
2569 one place to the left, so that the original second argument is now
2570 available as \c{%1}. Repeating this procedure as many times as there
2571 were arguments (achieved by supplying \c{%0} as the argument to
2572 \c{%rep}) causes each argument in turn to be pushed.
2574 Note also the use of \c{*} as the maximum parameter count,
2575 indicating that there is no upper limit on the number of parameters
2576 you may supply to the \i\c{multipush} macro.
2578 It would be convenient, when using this macro, to have a \c{POP}
2579 equivalent, which \e{didn't} require the arguments to be given in
2580 reverse order. Ideally, you would write the \c{multipush} macro
2581 call, then cut-and-paste the line to where the pop needed to be
2582 done, and change the name of the called macro to \c{multipop}, and
2583 the macro would take care of popping the registers in the opposite
2584 order from the one in which they were pushed.
2586 This can be done by the following definition:
2588 \c %macro multipop 1-*
2597 This macro begins by rotating its arguments one place to the
2598 \e{right}, so that the original \e{last} argument appears as \c{%1}.
2599 This is then popped, and the arguments are rotated right again, so
2600 the second-to-last argument becomes \c{%1}. Thus the arguments are
2601 iterated through in reverse order.
2604 \S{concat} \i{Concatenating Macro Parameters}
2606 NASM can concatenate macro parameters and macro indirection constructs
2607 on to other text surrounding them. This allows you to declare a family
2608 of symbols, for example, in a macro definition. If, for example, you
2609 wanted to generate a table of key codes along with offsets into the
2610 table, you could code something like
2612 \c %macro keytab_entry 2
2614 \c keypos%1 equ $-keytab
2620 \c keytab_entry F1,128+1
2621 \c keytab_entry F2,128+2
2622 \c keytab_entry Return,13
2624 which would expand to
2627 \c keyposF1 equ $-keytab
2629 \c keyposF2 equ $-keytab
2631 \c keyposReturn equ $-keytab
2634 You can just as easily concatenate text on to the other end of a
2635 macro parameter, by writing \c{%1foo}.
2637 If you need to append a \e{digit} to a macro parameter, for example
2638 defining labels \c{foo1} and \c{foo2} when passed the parameter
2639 \c{foo}, you can't code \c{%11} because that would be taken as the
2640 eleventh macro parameter. Instead, you must code
2641 \I{braces, after % sign}\c{%\{1\}1}, which will separate the first
2642 \c{1} (giving the number of the macro parameter) from the second
2643 (literal text to be concatenated to the parameter).
2645 This concatenation can also be applied to other preprocessor in-line
2646 objects, such as macro-local labels (\k{maclocal}) and context-local
2647 labels (\k{ctxlocal}). In all cases, ambiguities in syntax can be
2648 resolved by enclosing everything after the \c{%} sign and before the
2649 literal text in braces: so \c{%\{%foo\}bar} concatenates the text
2650 \c{bar} to the end of the real name of the macro-local label
2651 \c{%%foo}. (This is unnecessary, since the form NASM uses for the
2652 real names of macro-local labels means that the two usages
2653 \c{%\{%foo\}bar} and \c{%%foobar} would both expand to the same
2654 thing anyway; nevertheless, the capability is there.)
2656 The single-line macro indirection construct, \c{%[...]}
2657 (\k{indmacro}), behaves the same way as macro parameters for the
2658 purpose of concatenation.
2660 See also the \c{%+} operator, \k{concat%+}.
2663 \S{mlmaccc} \i{Condition Codes as Macro Parameters}
2665 NASM can give special treatment to a macro parameter which contains
2666 a condition code. For a start, you can refer to the macro parameter
2667 \c{%1} by means of the alternative syntax \i\c{%+1}, which informs
2668 NASM that this macro parameter is supposed to contain a condition
2669 code, and will cause the preprocessor to report an error message if
2670 the macro is called with a parameter which is \e{not} a valid
2673 Far more usefully, though, you can refer to the macro parameter by
2674 means of \i\c{%-1}, which NASM will expand as the \e{inverse}
2675 condition code. So the \c{retz} macro defined in \k{maclocal} can be
2676 replaced by a general \i{conditional-return macro} like this:
2686 This macro can now be invoked using calls like \c{retc ne}, which
2687 will cause the conditional-jump instruction in the macro expansion
2688 to come out as \c{JE}, or \c{retc po} which will make the jump a
2691 The \c{%+1} macro-parameter reference is quite happy to interpret
2692 the arguments \c{CXZ} and \c{ECXZ} as valid condition codes;
2693 however, \c{%-1} will report an error if passed either of these,
2694 because no inverse condition code exists.
2697 \S{nolist} \i{Disabling Listing Expansion}\I\c{.nolist}
2699 When NASM is generating a listing file from your program, it will
2700 generally expand multi-line macros by means of writing the macro
2701 call and then listing each line of the expansion. This allows you to
2702 see which instructions in the macro expansion are generating what
2703 code; however, for some macros this clutters the listing up
2706 NASM therefore provides the \c{.nolist} qualifier, which you can
2707 include in a macro definition to inhibit the expansion of the macro
2708 in the listing file. The \c{.nolist} qualifier comes directly after
2709 the number of parameters, like this:
2711 \c %macro foo 1.nolist
2715 \c %macro bar 1-5+.nolist a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h
2717 \S{unmacro} Undefining Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%unmacro}
2719 Multi-line macros can be removed with the \c{%unmacro} directive.
2720 Unlike the \c{%undef} directive, however, \c{%unmacro} takes an
2721 argument specification, and will only remove \i{exact matches} with
2722 that argument specification.
2731 removes the previously defined macro \c{foo}, but
2738 does \e{not} remove the macro \c{bar}, since the argument
2739 specification does not match exactly.
2741 \H{condasm} \i{Conditional Assembly}\I\c{%if}
2743 Similarly to the C preprocessor, NASM allows sections of a source
2744 file to be assembled only if certain conditions are met. The general
2745 syntax of this feature looks like this:
2748 \c ; some code which only appears if <condition> is met
2749 \c %elif<condition2>
2750 \c ; only appears if <condition> is not met but <condition2> is
2752 \c ; this appears if neither <condition> nor <condition2> was met
2755 The inverse forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn} are also supported.
2757 The \i\c{%else} clause is optional, as is the \i\c{%elif} clause.
2758 You can have more than one \c{%elif} clause as well.
2760 There are a number of variants of the \c{%if} directive. Each has its
2761 corresponding \c{%elif}, \c{%ifn}, and \c{%elifn} directives; for
2762 example, the equivalents to the \c{%ifdef} directive are \c{%elifdef},
2763 \c{%ifndef}, and \c{%elifndef}.
2765 \S{ifdef} \i\c{%ifdef}: Testing Single-Line Macro Existence\I{testing,
2766 single-line macro existence}
2768 Beginning a conditional-assembly block with the line \c{%ifdef
2769 MACRO} will assemble the subsequent code if, and only if, a
2770 single-line macro called \c{MACRO} is defined. If not, then the
2771 \c{%elif} and \c{%else} blocks (if any) will be processed instead.
2773 For example, when debugging a program, you might want to write code
2776 \c ; perform some function
2778 \c writefile 2,"Function performed successfully",13,10
2780 \c ; go and do something else
2782 Then you could use the command-line option \c{-dDEBUG} to create a
2783 version of the program which produced debugging messages, and remove
2784 the option to generate the final release version of the program.
2786 You can test for a macro \e{not} being defined by using
2787 \i\c{%ifndef} instead of \c{%ifdef}. You can also test for macro
2788 definitions in \c{%elif} blocks by using \i\c{%elifdef} and
2792 \S{ifmacro} \i\c{%ifmacro}: Testing Multi-Line Macro
2793 Existence\I{testing, multi-line macro existence}
2795 The \c{%ifmacro} directive operates in the same way as the \c{%ifdef}
2796 directive, except that it checks for the existence of a multi-line macro.
2798 For example, you may be working with a large project and not have control
2799 over the macros in a library. You may want to create a macro with one
2800 name if it doesn't already exist, and another name if one with that name
2803 The \c{%ifmacro} is considered true if defining a macro with the given name
2804 and number of arguments would cause a definitions conflict. For example:
2806 \c %ifmacro MyMacro 1-3
2808 \c %error "MyMacro 1-3" causes a conflict with an existing macro.
2812 \c %macro MyMacro 1-3
2814 \c ; insert code to define the macro
2820 This will create the macro "MyMacro 1-3" if no macro already exists which
2821 would conflict with it, and emits a warning if there would be a definition
2824 You can test for the macro not existing by using the \i\c{%ifnmacro} instead
2825 of \c{%ifmacro}. Additional tests can be performed in \c{%elif} blocks by using
2826 \i\c{%elifmacro} and \i\c{%elifnmacro}.
2829 \S{ifctx} \i\c{%ifctx}: Testing the Context Stack\I{testing, context
2832 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%ifctx} will cause the
2833 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the top context on
2834 the preprocessor's context stack has the same name as one of the arguments.
2835 As with \c{%ifdef}, the inverse and \c{%elif} forms \i\c{%ifnctx},
2836 \i\c{%elifctx} and \i\c{%elifnctx} are also supported.
2838 For more details of the context stack, see \k{ctxstack}. For a
2839 sample use of \c{%ifctx}, see \k{blockif}.
2842 \S{if} \i\c{%if}: Testing Arbitrary Numeric Expressions\I{testing,
2843 arbitrary numeric expressions}
2845 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%if expr} will cause the
2846 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the value of the
2847 numeric expression \c{expr} is non-zero. An example of the use of
2848 this feature is in deciding when to break out of a \c{%rep}
2849 preprocessor loop: see \k{rep} for a detailed example.
2851 The expression given to \c{%if}, and its counterpart \i\c{%elif}, is
2852 a critical expression (see \k{crit}).
2854 \c{%if} extends the normal NASM expression syntax, by providing a
2855 set of \i{relational operators} which are not normally available in
2856 expressions. The operators \i\c{=}, \i\c{<}, \i\c{>}, \i\c{<=},
2857 \i\c{>=} and \i\c{<>} test equality, less-than, greater-than,
2858 less-or-equal, greater-or-equal and not-equal respectively. The
2859 C-like forms \i\c{==} and \i\c{!=} are supported as alternative
2860 forms of \c{=} and \c{<>}. In addition, low-priority logical
2861 operators \i\c{&&}, \i\c{^^} and \i\c{||} are provided, supplying
2862 \i{logical AND}, \i{logical XOR} and \i{logical OR}. These work like
2863 the C logical operators (although C has no logical XOR), in that
2864 they always return either 0 or 1, and treat any non-zero input as 1
2865 (so that \c{^^}, for example, returns 1 if exactly one of its inputs
2866 is zero, and 0 otherwise). The relational operators also return 1
2867 for true and 0 for false.
2869 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%if} has a counterpart
2870 \i\c{%elif}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn}.
2872 \S{ifidn} \i\c{%ifidn} and \i\c{%ifidni}: Testing Exact Text
2873 Identity\I{testing, exact text identity}
2875 The construct \c{%ifidn text1,text2} will cause the subsequent code
2876 to be assembled if and only if \c{text1} and \c{text2}, after
2877 expanding single-line macros, are identical pieces of text.
2878 Differences in white space are not counted.
2880 \c{%ifidni} is similar to \c{%ifidn}, but is \i{case-insensitive}.
2882 For example, the following macro pushes a register or number on the
2883 stack, and allows you to treat \c{IP} as a real register:
2885 \c %macro pushparam 1
2896 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%ifidn} has a counterpart
2897 \i\c{%elifidn}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifnidn} and \i\c{%elifnidn}.
2898 Similarly, \c{%ifidni} has counterparts \i\c{%elifidni},
2899 \i\c{%ifnidni} and \i\c{%elifnidni}.
2901 \S{iftyp} \i\c{%ifid}, \i\c{%ifnum}, \i\c{%ifstr}: Testing Token
2902 Types\I{testing, token types}
2904 Some macros will want to perform different tasks depending on
2905 whether they are passed a number, a string, or an identifier. For
2906 example, a string output macro might want to be able to cope with
2907 being passed either a string constant or a pointer to an existing
2910 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifid}, taking one parameter
2911 (which may be blank), assembles the subsequent code if and only if
2912 the first token in the parameter exists and is an identifier.
2913 \c{%ifnum} works similarly, but tests for the token being a numeric
2914 constant; \c{%ifstr} tests for it being a string.
2916 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
2917 extended to take advantage of \c{%ifstr} in the following fashion:
2919 \c %macro writefile 2-3+
2928 \c %%endstr: mov dx,%%str
2929 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
2940 Then the \c{writefile} macro can cope with being called in either of
2941 the following two ways:
2943 \c writefile [file], strpointer, length
2944 \c writefile [file], "hello", 13, 10
2946 In the first, \c{strpointer} is used as the address of an
2947 already-declared string, and \c{length} is used as its length; in
2948 the second, a string is given to the macro, which therefore declares
2949 it itself and works out the address and length for itself.
2951 Note the use of \c{%if} inside the \c{%ifstr}: this is to detect
2952 whether the macro was passed two arguments (so the string would be a
2953 single string constant, and \c{db %2} would be adequate) or more (in
2954 which case, all but the first two would be lumped together into
2955 \c{%3}, and \c{db %2,%3} would be required).
2957 The usual \I\c{%elifid}\I\c{%elifnum}\I\c{%elifstr}\c{%elif}...,
2958 \I\c{%ifnid}\I\c{%ifnnum}\I\c{%ifnstr}\c{%ifn}..., and
2959 \I\c{%elifnid}\I\c{%elifnnum}\I\c{%elifnstr}\c{%elifn}... versions
2960 exist for each of \c{%ifid}, \c{%ifnum} and \c{%ifstr}.
2962 \S{iftoken} \i\c{%iftoken}: Test for a Single Token
2964 Some macros will want to do different things depending on if it is
2965 passed a single token (e.g. paste it to something else using \c{%+})
2966 versus a multi-token sequence.
2968 The conditional assembly construct \c{%iftoken} assembles the
2969 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters consist of
2970 exactly one token, possibly surrounded by whitespace.
2976 will assemble the subsequent code, but
2980 will not, since \c{-1} contains two tokens: the unary minus operator
2981 \c{-}, and the number \c{1}.
2983 The usual \i\c{%eliftoken}, \i\c\{%ifntoken}, and \i\c{%elifntoken}
2984 variants are also provided.
2986 \S{ifempty} \i\c{%ifempty}: Test for Empty Expansion
2988 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifempty} assembles the
2989 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters do not contain
2990 any tokens at all, whitespace excepted.
2992 The usual \i\c{%elifempty}, \i\c\{%ifnempty}, and \i\c{%elifnempty}
2993 variants are also provided.
2995 \H{rep} \i{Preprocessor Loops}\I{repeating code}: \i\c{%rep}
2997 NASM's \c{TIMES} prefix, though useful, cannot be used to invoke a
2998 multi-line macro multiple times, because it is processed by NASM
2999 after macros have already been expanded. Therefore NASM provides
3000 another form of loop, this time at the preprocessor level: \c{%rep}.
3002 The directives \c{%rep} and \i\c{%endrep} (\c{%rep} takes a numeric
3003 argument, which can be an expression; \c{%endrep} takes no
3004 arguments) can be used to enclose a chunk of code, which is then
3005 replicated as many times as specified by the preprocessor:
3009 \c inc word [table+2*i]
3013 This will generate a sequence of 64 \c{INC} instructions,
3014 incrementing every word of memory from \c{[table]} to
3017 For more complex termination conditions, or to break out of a repeat
3018 loop part way along, you can use the \i\c{%exitrep} directive to
3019 terminate the loop, like this:
3034 \c fib_number equ ($-fibonacci)/2
3036 This produces a list of all the Fibonacci numbers that will fit in
3037 16 bits. Note that a maximum repeat count must still be given to
3038 \c{%rep}. This is to prevent the possibility of NASM getting into an
3039 infinite loop in the preprocessor, which (on multitasking or
3040 multi-user systems) would typically cause all the system memory to
3041 be gradually used up and other applications to start crashing.
3044 \H{files} Source Files and Dependencies
3046 These commands allow you to split your sources into multiple files.
3048 \S{include} \i\c{%include}: \i{Including Other Files}
3050 Using, once again, a very similar syntax to the C preprocessor,
3051 NASM's preprocessor lets you include other source files into your
3052 code. This is done by the use of the \i\c{%include} directive:
3054 \c %include "macros.mac"
3056 will include the contents of the file \c{macros.mac} into the source
3057 file containing the \c{%include} directive.
3059 Include files are \I{searching for include files}searched for in the
3060 current directory (the directory you're in when you run NASM, as
3061 opposed to the location of the NASM executable or the location of
3062 the source file), plus any directories specified on the NASM command
3063 line using the \c{-i} option.
3065 The standard C idiom for preventing a file being included more than
3066 once is just as applicable in NASM: if the file \c{macros.mac} has
3069 \c %ifndef MACROS_MAC
3070 \c %define MACROS_MAC
3071 \c ; now define some macros
3074 then including the file more than once will not cause errors,
3075 because the second time the file is included nothing will happen
3076 because the macro \c{MACROS_MAC} will already be defined.
3078 You can force a file to be included even if there is no \c{%include}
3079 directive that explicitly includes it, by using the \i\c{-p} option
3080 on the NASM command line (see \k{opt-p}).
3083 \S{pathsearch} \i\c{%pathsearch}: Search the Include Path
3085 The \c{%pathsearch} directive takes a single-line macro name and a
3086 filename, and declare or redefines the specified single-line macro to
3087 be the include-path-resolved version of the filename, if the file
3088 exists (otherwise, it is passed unchanged.)
3092 \c %pathsearch MyFoo "foo.bin"
3094 ... with \c{-Ibins/} in the include path may end up defining the macro
3095 \c{MyFoo} to be \c{"bins/foo.bin"}.
3098 \S{depend} \i\c{%depend}: Add Dependent Files
3100 The \c{%depend} directive takes a filename and adds it to the list of
3101 files to be emitted as dependency generation when the \c{-M} options
3102 and its relatives (see \k{opt-M}) are used. It produces no output.
3104 This is generally used in conjunction with \c{%pathsearch}. For
3105 example, a simplified version of the standard macro wrapper for the
3106 \c{INCBIN} directive looks like:
3108 \c %imacro incbin 1-2+ 0
3109 \c %pathsearch dep %1
3114 This first resolves the location of the file into the macro \c{dep},
3115 then adds it to the dependency lists, and finally issues the
3116 assembler-level \c{INCBIN} directive.
3119 \S{use} \i\c{%use}: Include Standard Macro Package
3121 The \c{%use} directive is similar to \c{%include}, but rather than
3122 including the contents of a file, it includes a named standard macro
3123 package. The standard macro packages are part of NASM, and are
3124 described in \k{macropkg}.
3126 Unlike the \c{%include} directive, package names for the \c{%use}
3127 directive do not require quotes, but quotes are permitted. In NASM
3128 2.04 and 2.05 the unquoted form would be macro-expanded; this is no
3129 longer true. Thus, the following lines are equivalent:
3134 Standard macro packages are protected from multiple inclusion. When a
3135 standard macro package is used, a testable single-line macro of the
3136 form \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is also defined, see \k{use_def}.
3138 \H{ctxstack} The \i{Context Stack}
3140 Having labels that are local to a macro definition is sometimes not
3141 quite powerful enough: sometimes you want to be able to share labels
3142 between several macro calls. An example might be a \c{REPEAT} ...
3143 \c{UNTIL} loop, in which the expansion of the \c{REPEAT} macro
3144 would need to be able to refer to a label which the \c{UNTIL} macro
3145 had defined. However, for such a macro you would also want to be
3146 able to nest these loops.
3148 NASM provides this level of power by means of a \e{context stack}.
3149 The preprocessor maintains a stack of \e{contexts}, each of which is
3150 characterized by a name. You add a new context to the stack using
3151 the \i\c{%push} directive, and remove one using \i\c{%pop}. You can
3152 define labels that are local to a particular context on the stack.
3155 \S{pushpop} \i\c{%push} and \i\c{%pop}: \I{creating
3156 contexts}\I{removing contexts}Creating and Removing Contexts
3158 The \c{%push} directive is used to create a new context and place it
3159 on the top of the context stack. \c{%push} takes an optional argument,
3160 which is the name of the context. For example:
3164 This pushes a new context called \c{foobar} on the stack. You can have
3165 several contexts on the stack with the same name: they can still be
3166 distinguished. If no name is given, the context is unnamed (this is
3167 normally used when both the \c{%push} and the \c{%pop} are inside a
3168 single macro definition.)
3170 The directive \c{%pop}, taking one optional argument, removes the top
3171 context from the context stack and destroys it, along with any
3172 labels associated with it. If an argument is given, it must match the
3173 name of the current context, otherwise it will issue an error.
3176 \S{ctxlocal} \i{Context-Local Labels}
3178 Just as the usage \c{%%foo} defines a label which is local to the
3179 particular macro call in which it is used, the usage \I{%$}\c{%$foo}
3180 is used to define a label which is local to the context on the top
3181 of the context stack. So the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} example given
3182 above could be implemented by means of:
3198 and invoked by means of, for example,
3206 which would scan every fourth byte of a string in search of the byte
3209 If you need to define, or access, labels local to the context
3210 \e{below} the top one on the stack, you can use \I{%$$}\c{%$$foo}, or
3211 \c{%$$$foo} for the context below that, and so on.
3214 \S{ctxdefine} \i{Context-Local Single-Line Macros}
3216 NASM also allows you to define single-line macros which are local to
3217 a particular context, in just the same way:
3219 \c %define %$localmac 3
3221 will define the single-line macro \c{%$localmac} to be local to the
3222 top context on the stack. Of course, after a subsequent \c{%push},
3223 it can then still be accessed by the name \c{%$$localmac}.
3226 \S{ctxrepl} \i\c{%repl}: \I{renaming contexts}Renaming a Context
3228 If you need to change the name of the top context on the stack (in
3229 order, for example, to have it respond differently to \c{%ifctx}),
3230 you can execute a \c{%pop} followed by a \c{%push}; but this will
3231 have the side effect of destroying all context-local labels and
3232 macros associated with the context that was just popped.
3234 NASM provides the directive \c{%repl}, which \e{replaces} a context
3235 with a different name, without touching the associated macros and
3236 labels. So you could replace the destructive code
3241 with the non-destructive version \c{%repl newname}.
3244 \S{blockif} Example Use of the \i{Context Stack}: \i{Block IFs}
3246 This example makes use of almost all the context-stack features,
3247 including the conditional-assembly construct \i\c{%ifctx}, to
3248 implement a block IF statement as a set of macros.
3264 \c %error "expected `if' before `else'"
3278 \c %error "expected `if' or `else' before `endif'"
3283 This code is more robust than the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} macros
3284 given in \k{ctxlocal}, because it uses conditional assembly to check
3285 that the macros are issued in the right order (for example, not
3286 calling \c{endif} before \c{if}) and issues a \c{%error} if they're
3289 In addition, the \c{endif} macro has to be able to cope with the two
3290 distinct cases of either directly following an \c{if}, or following
3291 an \c{else}. It achieves this, again, by using conditional assembly
3292 to do different things depending on whether the context on top of
3293 the stack is \c{if} or \c{else}.
3295 The \c{else} macro has to preserve the context on the stack, in
3296 order to have the \c{%$ifnot} referred to by the \c{if} macro be the
3297 same as the one defined by the \c{endif} macro, but has to change
3298 the context's name so that \c{endif} will know there was an
3299 intervening \c{else}. It does this by the use of \c{%repl}.
3301 A sample usage of these macros might look like:
3323 The block-\c{IF} macros handle nesting quite happily, by means of
3324 pushing another context, describing the inner \c{if}, on top of the
3325 one describing the outer \c{if}; thus \c{else} and \c{endif} always
3326 refer to the last unmatched \c{if} or \c{else}.
3329 \H{stackrel} \i{Stack Relative Preprocessor Directives}
3331 The following preprocessor directives provide a way to use
3332 labels to refer to local variables allocated on the stack.
3334 \b\c{%arg} (see \k{arg})
3336 \b\c{%stacksize} (see \k{stacksize})
3338 \b\c{%local} (see \k{local})
3341 \S{arg} \i\c{%arg} Directive
3343 The \c{%arg} directive is used to simplify the handling of
3344 parameters passed on the stack. Stack based parameter passing
3345 is used by many high level languages, including C, C++ and Pascal.
3347 While NASM has macros which attempt to duplicate this
3348 functionality (see \k{16cmacro}), the syntax is not particularly
3349 convenient to use. and is not TASM compatible. Here is an example
3350 which shows the use of \c{%arg} without any external macros:
3354 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3355 \c %stacksize large ; tell NASM to use bp
3356 \c %arg i:word, j_ptr:word
3363 \c %pop ; restore original context
3365 This is similar to the procedure defined in \k{16cmacro} and adds
3366 the value in i to the value pointed to by j_ptr and returns the
3367 sum in the ax register. See \k{pushpop} for an explanation of
3368 \c{push} and \c{pop} and the use of context stacks.
3371 \S{stacksize} \i\c{%stacksize} Directive
3373 The \c{%stacksize} directive is used in conjunction with the
3374 \c{%arg} (see \k{arg}) and the \c{%local} (see \k{local}) directives.
3375 It tells NASM the default size to use for subsequent \c{%arg} and
3376 \c{%local} directives. The \c{%stacksize} directive takes one
3377 required argument which is one of \c{flat}, \c{flat64}, \c{large} or \c{small}.
3381 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3382 relative to \c{ebp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3383 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{eip} is on the stack).
3385 \c %stacksize flat64
3387 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3388 relative to \c{rbp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3389 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{rip} is on the stack).
3393 This form uses \c{bp} to do stack-based parameter addressing and
3394 assumes that a far form of call was used to get to this address
3395 (i.e. that \c{ip} and \c{cs} are on the stack).
3399 This form also uses \c{bp} to address stack parameters, but it is
3400 different from \c{large} because it also assumes that the old value
3401 of bp is pushed onto the stack (i.e. it expects an \c{ENTER}
3402 instruction). In other words, it expects that \c{bp}, \c{ip} and
3403 \c{cs} are on the top of the stack, underneath any local space which
3404 may have been allocated by \c{ENTER}. This form is probably most
3405 useful when used in combination with the \c{%local} directive
3409 \S{local} \i\c{%local} Directive
3411 The \c{%local} directive is used to simplify the use of local
3412 temporary stack variables allocated in a stack frame. Automatic
3413 local variables in C are an example of this kind of variable. The
3414 \c{%local} directive is most useful when used with the \c{%stacksize}
3415 (see \k{stacksize} and is also compatible with the \c{%arg} directive
3416 (see \k{arg}). It allows simplified reference to variables on the
3417 stack which have been allocated typically by using the \c{ENTER}
3419 \# (see \k{insENTER} for a description of that instruction).
3420 An example of its use is the following:
3424 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3425 \c %stacksize small ; tell NASM to use bp
3426 \c %assign %$localsize 0 ; see text for explanation
3427 \c %local old_ax:word, old_dx:word
3429 \c enter %$localsize,0 ; see text for explanation
3430 \c mov [old_ax],ax ; swap ax & bx
3431 \c mov [old_dx],dx ; and swap dx & cx
3436 \c leave ; restore old bp
3439 \c %pop ; restore original context
3441 The \c{%$localsize} variable is used internally by the
3442 \c{%local} directive and \e{must} be defined within the
3443 current context before the \c{%local} directive may be used.
3444 Failure to do so will result in one expression syntax error for
3445 each \c{%local} variable declared. It then may be used in
3446 the construction of an appropriately sized ENTER instruction
3447 as shown in the example.
3450 \H{pperror} Reporting \i{User-Defined Errors}: \i\c{%error}, \i\c{%warning}, \i\c{%fatal}
3452 The preprocessor directive \c{%error} will cause NASM to report an
3453 error if it occurs in assembled code. So if other users are going to
3454 try to assemble your source files, you can ensure that they define the
3455 right macros by means of code like this:
3460 \c ; do some different setup
3462 \c %error "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined."
3465 Then any user who fails to understand the way your code is supposed
3466 to be assembled will be quickly warned of their mistake, rather than
3467 having to wait until the program crashes on being run and then not
3468 knowing what went wrong.
3470 Similarly, \c{%warning} issues a warning, but allows assembly to continue:
3475 \c ; do some different setup
3477 \c %warning "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined, assuming F1."
3481 \c{%error} and \c{%warning} are issued only on the final assembly
3482 pass. This makes them safe to use in conjunction with tests that
3483 depend on symbol values.
3485 \c{%fatal} terminates assembly immediately, regardless of pass. This
3486 is useful when there is no point in continuing the assembly further,
3487 and doing so is likely just going to cause a spew of confusing error
3490 It is optional for the message string after \c{%error}, \c{%warning}
3491 or \c{%fatal} to be quoted. If it is \e{not}, then single-line macros
3492 are expanded in it, which can be used to display more information to
3493 the user. For example:
3496 \c %assign foo_over foo-64
3497 \c %error foo is foo_over bytes too large
3501 \H{otherpreproc} \i{Other Preprocessor Directives}
3503 NASM also has preprocessor directives which allow access to
3504 information from external sources. Currently they include:
3506 \b\c{%line} enables NASM to correctly handle the output of another
3507 preprocessor (see \k{line}).
3509 \b\c{%!} enables NASM to read in the value of an environment variable,
3510 which can then be used in your program (see \k{getenv}).
3512 \S{line} \i\c{%line} Directive
3514 The \c{%line} directive is used to notify NASM that the input line
3515 corresponds to a specific line number in another file. Typically
3516 this other file would be an original source file, with the current
3517 NASM input being the output of a pre-processor. The \c{%line}
3518 directive allows NASM to output messages which indicate the line
3519 number of the original source file, instead of the file that is being
3522 This preprocessor directive is not generally of use to programmers,
3523 by may be of interest to preprocessor authors. The usage of the
3524 \c{%line} preprocessor directive is as follows:
3526 \c %line nnn[+mmm] [filename]
3528 In this directive, \c{nnn} identifies the line of the original source
3529 file which this line corresponds to. \c{mmm} is an optional parameter
3530 which specifies a line increment value; each line of the input file
3531 read in is considered to correspond to \c{mmm} lines of the original
3532 source file. Finally, \c{filename} is an optional parameter which
3533 specifies the file name of the original source file.
3535 After reading a \c{%line} preprocessor directive, NASM will report
3536 all file name and line numbers relative to the values specified
3540 \S{getenv} \i\c{%!}\c{<env>}: Read an environment variable.
3542 The \c{%!<env>} directive makes it possible to read the value of an
3543 environment variable at assembly time. This could, for example, be used
3544 to store the contents of an environment variable into a string, which
3545 could be used at some other point in your code.
3547 For example, suppose that you have an environment variable \c{FOO}, and
3548 you want the contents of \c{FOO} to be embedded in your program. You
3549 could do that as follows:
3551 \c %defstr FOO %!FOO
3553 See \k{defstr} for notes on the \c{%defstr} directive.
3556 \H{stdmac} \i{Standard Macros}
3558 NASM defines a set of standard macros, which are already defined
3559 when it starts to process any source file. If you really need a
3560 program to be assembled with no pre-defined macros, you can use the
3561 \i\c{%clear} directive to empty the preprocessor of everything but
3562 context-local preprocessor variables and single-line macros.
3564 Most \i{user-level assembler directives} (see \k{directive}) are
3565 implemented as macros which invoke primitive directives; these are
3566 described in \k{directive}. The rest of the standard macro set is
3570 \S{stdmacver} \i{NASM Version} Macros
3572 The single-line macros \i\c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \i\c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3573 \i\c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \i\c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} expand to the
3574 major, minor, subminor and patch level parts of the \i{version
3575 number of NASM} being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32p1 for
3576 example, \c{__NASM_MAJOR__} would be defined to be 0, \c{__NASM_MINOR__}
3577 would be defined as 98, \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} would be defined to 32,
3578 and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} would be defined as 1.
3580 Additionally, the macro \i\c{__NASM_SNAPSHOT__} is defined for
3581 automatically generated snapshot releases \e{only}.
3584 \S{stdmacverid} \i\c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__}: \i{NASM Version ID}
3586 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__} expands to a dword integer
3587 representing the full version number of the version of nasm being used.
3588 The value is the equivalent to \c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3589 \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} concatenated to
3590 produce a single doubleword. Hence, for 0.98.32p1, the returned number
3591 would be equivalent to:
3599 Note that the above lines are generate exactly the same code, the second
3600 line is used just to give an indication of the order that the separate
3601 values will be present in memory.
3604 \S{stdmacverstr} \i\c{__NASM_VER__}: \i{NASM Version string}
3606 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VER__} expands to a string which defines
3607 the version number of nasm being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32 for example,
3616 \S{fileline} \i\c{__FILE__} and \i\c{__LINE__}: File Name and Line Number
3618 Like the C preprocessor, NASM allows the user to find out the file
3619 name and line number containing the current instruction. The macro
3620 \c{__FILE__} expands to a string constant giving the name of the
3621 current input file (which may change through the course of assembly
3622 if \c{%include} directives are used), and \c{__LINE__} expands to a
3623 numeric constant giving the current line number in the input file.
3625 These macros could be used, for example, to communicate debugging
3626 information to a macro, since invoking \c{__LINE__} inside a macro
3627 definition (either single-line or multi-line) will return the line
3628 number of the macro \e{call}, rather than \e{definition}. So to
3629 determine where in a piece of code a crash is occurring, for
3630 example, one could write a routine \c{stillhere}, which is passed a
3631 line number in \c{EAX} and outputs something like `line 155: still
3632 here'. You could then write a macro
3634 \c %macro notdeadyet 0
3643 and then pepper your code with calls to \c{notdeadyet} until you
3644 find the crash point.
3647 \S{bitsm} \i\c{__BITS__}: Current BITS Mode
3649 The \c{__BITS__} standard macro is updated every time that the BITS mode is
3650 set using the \c{BITS XX} or \c{[BITS XX]} directive, where XX is a valid mode
3651 number of 16, 32 or 64. \c{__BITS__} receives the specified mode number and
3652 makes it globally available. This can be very useful for those who utilize
3653 mode-dependent macros.
3655 \S{ofmtm} \i\c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__}: Current Output Format
3657 The \c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__} standard macro holds the current Output Format,
3658 as given by the \c{-f} option or NASM's default. Type \c{nasm -hf} for a
3661 \c %ifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, win32
3662 \c %define NEWLINE 13, 10
3663 \c %elifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, elf32
3664 \c %define NEWLINE 10
3668 \S{datetime} Assembly Date and Time Macros
3670 NASM provides a variety of macros that represent the timestamp of the
3673 \b The \i\c{__DATE__} and \i\c{__TIME__} macros give the assembly date and
3674 time as strings, in ISO 8601 format (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"},
3677 \b The \i\c{__DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__TIME_NUM__} macros give the assembly
3678 date and time in numeric form; in the format \c{YYYYMMDD} and
3679 \c{HHMMSS} respectively.
3681 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME__} macros give the assembly
3682 date and time in universal time (UTC) as strings, in ISO 8601 format
3683 (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"}, respectively.) If the host
3684 platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are undefined.
3686 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME_NUM__} macros give the
3687 assembly date and time universal time (UTC) in numeric form; in the
3688 format \c{YYYYMMDD} and \c{HHMMSS} respectively. If the
3689 host platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are
3692 \b The \c{__POSIX_TIME__} macro is defined as a number containing the
3693 number of seconds since the POSIX epoch, 1 January 1970 00:00:00 UTC;
3694 excluding any leap seconds. This is computed using UTC time if
3695 available on the host platform, otherwise it is computed using the
3696 local time as if it was UTC.
3698 All instances of time and date macros in the same assembly session
3699 produce consistent output. For example, in an assembly session
3700 started at 42 seconds after midnight on January 1, 2010 in Moscow
3701 (timezone UTC+3) these macros would have the following values,
3702 assuming, of course, a properly configured environment with a correct
3705 \c __DATE__ "2010-01-01"
3706 \c __TIME__ "00:00:42"
3707 \c __DATE_NUM__ 20100101
3708 \c __TIME_NUM__ 000042
3709 \c __UTC_DATE__ "2009-12-31"
3710 \c __UTC_TIME__ "21:00:42"
3711 \c __UTC_DATE_NUM__ 20091231
3712 \c __UTC_TIME_NUM__ 210042
3713 \c __POSIX_TIME__ 1262293242
3716 \S{use_def} \I\c{__USE_*__}\c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__}: Package
3719 When a standard macro package (see \k{macropkg}) is included with the
3720 \c{%use} directive (see \k{use}), a single-line macro of the form
3721 \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is automatically defined. This allows
3722 testing if a particular package is invoked or not.
3724 For example, if the \c{altreg} package is included (see
3725 \k{pkg_altreg}), then the macro \c{__USE_ALTREG__} is defined.
3728 \S{pass_macro} \i\c{__PASS__}: Assembly Pass
3730 The macro \c{__PASS__} is defined to be \c{1} on preparatory passes,
3731 and \c{2} on the final pass. In preprocess-only mode, it is set to
3732 \c{3}, and when running only to generate dependencies (due to the
3733 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} option, see \k{opt-M}) it is set to \c{0}.
3735 \e{Avoid using this macro if at all possible. It is tremendously easy
3736 to generate very strange errors by misusing it, and the semantics may
3737 change in future versions of NASM.}
3740 \S{struc} \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC}: \i{Declaring Structure} Data Types
3742 The core of NASM contains no intrinsic means of defining data
3743 structures; instead, the preprocessor is sufficiently powerful that
3744 data structures can be implemented as a set of macros. The macros
3745 \c{STRUC} and \c{ENDSTRUC} are used to define a structure data type.
3747 \c{STRUC} takes one or two parameters. The first parameter is the name
3748 of the data type. The second, optional parameter is the base offset of
3749 the structure. The name of the data type is defined as a symbol with
3750 the value of the base offset, and the name of the data type with the
3751 suffix \c{_size} appended to it is defined as an \c{EQU} giving the
3752 size of the structure. Once \c{STRUC} has been issued, you are
3753 defining the structure, and should define fields using the \c{RESB}
3754 family of pseudo-instructions, and then invoke \c{ENDSTRUC} to finish
3757 For example, to define a structure called \c{mytype} containing a
3758 longword, a word, a byte and a string of bytes, you might code
3769 The above code defines six symbols: \c{mt_long} as 0 (the offset
3770 from the beginning of a \c{mytype} structure to the longword field),
3771 \c{mt_word} as 4, \c{mt_byte} as 6, \c{mt_str} as 7, \c{mytype_size}
3772 as 39, and \c{mytype} itself as zero.
3774 The reason why the structure type name is defined at zero by default
3775 is a side effect of allowing structures to work with the local label
3776 mechanism: if your structure members tend to have the same names in
3777 more than one structure, you can define the above structure like this:
3788 This defines the offsets to the structure fields as \c{mytype.long},
3789 \c{mytype.word}, \c{mytype.byte} and \c{mytype.str}.
3791 NASM, since it has no \e{intrinsic} structure support, does not
3792 support any form of period notation to refer to the elements of a
3793 structure once you have one (except the above local-label notation),
3794 so code such as \c{mov ax,[mystruc.mt_word]} is not valid.
3795 \c{mt_word} is a constant just like any other constant, so the
3796 correct syntax is \c{mov ax,[mystruc+mt_word]} or \c{mov
3797 ax,[mystruc+mytype.word]}.
3799 Sometimes you only have the address of the structure displaced by an
3800 offset. For example, consider this standard stack frame setup:
3806 In this case, you could access an element by subtracting the offset:
3808 \c mov [ebp - 40 + mytype.word], ax
3810 However, if you do not want to repeat this offset, you can use -40 as
3813 \c struc mytype, -40
3815 And access an element this way:
3817 \c mov [ebp + mytype.word], ax
3820 \S{istruc} \i\c{ISTRUC}, \i\c{AT} and \i\c{IEND}: Declaring
3821 \i{Instances of Structures}
3823 Having defined a structure type, the next thing you typically want
3824 to do is to declare instances of that structure in your data
3825 segment. NASM provides an easy way to do this in the \c{ISTRUC}
3826 mechanism. To declare a structure of type \c{mytype} in a program,
3827 you code something like this:
3832 \c at mt_long, dd 123456
3833 \c at mt_word, dw 1024
3834 \c at mt_byte, db 'x'
3835 \c at mt_str, db 'hello, world', 13, 10, 0
3839 The function of the \c{AT} macro is to make use of the \c{TIMES}
3840 prefix to advance the assembly position to the correct point for the
3841 specified structure field, and then to declare the specified data.
3842 Therefore the structure fields must be declared in the same order as
3843 they were specified in the structure definition.
3845 If the data to go in a structure field requires more than one source
3846 line to specify, the remaining source lines can easily come after
3847 the \c{AT} line. For example:
3849 \c at mt_str, db 123,134,145,156,167,178,189
3852 Depending on personal taste, you can also omit the code part of the
3853 \c{AT} line completely, and start the structure field on the next
3857 \c db 'hello, world'
3861 \S{align} \i\c{ALIGN} and \i\c{ALIGNB}: Data Alignment
3863 The \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros provides a convenient way to
3864 align code or data on a word, longword, paragraph or other boundary.
3865 (Some assemblers call this directive \i\c{EVEN}.) The syntax of the
3866 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros is
3868 \c align 4 ; align on 4-byte boundary
3869 \c align 16 ; align on 16-byte boundary
3870 \c align 8,db 0 ; pad with 0s rather than NOPs
3871 \c align 4,resb 1 ; align to 4 in the BSS
3872 \c alignb 4 ; equivalent to previous line
3874 Both macros require their first argument to be a power of two; they
3875 both compute the number of additional bytes required to bring the
3876 length of the current section up to a multiple of that power of two,
3877 and then apply the \c{TIMES} prefix to their second argument to
3878 perform the alignment.
3880 If the second argument is not specified, the default for \c{ALIGN}
3881 is \c{NOP}, and the default for \c{ALIGNB} is \c{RESB 1}. So if the
3882 second argument is specified, the two macros are equivalent.
3883 Normally, you can just use \c{ALIGN} in code and data sections and
3884 \c{ALIGNB} in BSS sections, and never need the second argument
3885 except for special purposes.
3887 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB}, being simple macros, perform no error
3888 checking: they cannot warn you if their first argument fails to be a
3889 power of two, or if their second argument generates more than one
3890 byte of code. In each of these cases they will silently do the wrong
3893 \c{ALIGNB} (or \c{ALIGN} with a second argument of \c{RESB 1}) can
3894 be used within structure definitions:
3911 This will ensure that the structure members are sensibly aligned
3912 relative to the base of the structure.
3914 A final caveat: \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} work relative to the
3915 beginning of the \e{section}, not the beginning of the address space
3916 in the final executable. Aligning to a 16-byte boundary when the
3917 section you're in is only guaranteed to be aligned to a 4-byte
3918 boundary, for example, is a waste of effort. Again, NASM does not
3919 check that the section's alignment characteristics are sensible for
3920 the use of \c{ALIGN} or \c{ALIGNB}.
3922 See also the \c{smartalign} standard macro package, \k{pkg_smartalign}.
3925 \C{macropkg} \i{Standard Macro Packages}
3927 The \i\c{%use} directive (see \k{use}) includes one of the standard
3928 macro packages included with the NASM distribution and compiled into
3929 the NASM binary. It operates like the \c{%include} directive (see
3930 \k{include}), but the included contents is provided by NASM itself.
3932 The names of standard macro packages are case insensitive, and can be
3936 \H{pkg_altreg} \i\c{altreg}: \i{Alternate Register Names}
3938 The \c{altreg} standard macro package provides alternate register
3939 names. It provides numeric register names for all registers (not just
3940 \c{R8}-\c{R15}), the Intel-defined aliases \c{R8L}-\c{R15L} for the
3941 low bytes of register (as opposed to the NASM/AMD standard names
3942 \c{R8B}-\c{R15B}), and the names \c{R0H}-\c{R3H} (by analogy with
3943 \c{R0L}-\c{R3L}) for \c{AH}, \c{CH}, \c{DH}, and \c{BH}.
3950 \c mov r0l,r3h ; mov al,bh
3956 \H{pkg_smartalign} \i\c{smartalign}\I{align, smart}: Smart \c{ALIGN} Macro
3958 The \c{smartalign} standard macro package provides for an \i\c{ALIGN}
3959 macro which is more powerful than the default (and
3960 backwards-compatible) one (see \k{align}). When the \c{smartalign}
3961 package is enabled, when \c{ALIGN} is used without a second argument,
3962 NASM will generate a sequence of instructions more efficient than a
3963 series of \c{NOP}. Furthermore, if the padding exceeds a specific
3964 threshold, then NASM will generate a jump over the entire padding
3967 The specific instructions generated can be controlled with the
3968 new \i\c{ALIGNMODE} macro. This macro takes two parameters: one mode,
3969 and an optional jump threshold override. The modes are as
3972 \b \c{generic}: Works on all x86 CPUs and should have reasonable
3973 performance. The default jump threshold is 8. This is the
3976 \b \c{nop}: Pad out with \c{NOP} instructions. The only difference
3977 compared to the standard \c{ALIGN} macro is that NASM can still jump
3978 over a large padding area. The default jump threshold is 16.
3980 \b \c{k7}: Optimize for the AMD K7 (Athlon/Althon XP). These
3981 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
3984 \b \c{k8}: Optimize for the AMD K8 (Opteron/Althon 64). These
3985 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
3988 \b \c{p6}: Optimize for Intel CPUs. This uses the long \c{NOP}
3989 instructions first introduced in Pentium Pro. This is incompatible
3990 with all CPUs of family 5 or lower, as well as some VIA CPUs and
3991 several virtualization solutions. The default jump threshold is 16.
3993 The macro \i\c{__ALIGNMODE__} is defined to contain the current
3994 alignment mode. A number of other macros beginning with \c{__ALIGN_}
3995 are used internally by this macro package.
3998 \C{directive} \i{Assembler Directives}
4000 NASM, though it attempts to avoid the bureaucracy of assemblers like
4001 MASM and TASM, is nevertheless forced to support a \e{few}
4002 directives. These are described in this chapter.
4004 NASM's directives come in two types: \I{user-level
4005 directives}\e{user-level} directives and \I{primitive
4006 directives}\e{primitive} directives. Typically, each directive has a
4007 user-level form and a primitive form. In almost all cases, we
4008 recommend that users use the user-level forms of the directives,
4009 which are implemented as macros which call the primitive forms.
4011 Primitive directives are enclosed in square brackets; user-level
4014 In addition to the universal directives described in this chapter,
4015 each object file format can optionally supply extra directives in
4016 order to control particular features of that file format. These
4017 \I{format-specific directives}\e{format-specific} directives are
4018 documented along with the formats that implement them, in \k{outfmt}.
4021 \H{bits} \i\c{BITS}: Specifying Target \i{Processor Mode}
4023 The \c{BITS} directive specifies whether NASM should generate code
4024 \I{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}designed to run on a processor
4025 operating in 16-bit mode, 32-bit mode or 64-bit mode. The syntax is
4026 \c{BITS XX}, where XX is 16, 32 or 64.
4028 In most cases, you should not need to use \c{BITS} explicitly. The
4029 \c{aout}, \c{coff}, \c{elf}, \c{macho}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}
4030 object formats, which are designed for use in 32-bit or 64-bit
4031 operating systems, all cause NASM to select 32-bit or 64-bit mode,
4032 respectively, by default. The \c{obj} object format allows you
4033 to specify each segment you define as either \c{USE16} or \c{USE32},
4034 and NASM will set its operating mode accordingly, so the use of the
4035 \c{BITS} directive is once again unnecessary.
4037 The most likely reason for using the \c{BITS} directive is to write
4038 32-bit or 64-bit code in a flat binary file; this is because the \c{bin}
4039 output format defaults to 16-bit mode in anticipation of it being
4040 used most frequently to write DOS \c{.COM} programs, DOS \c{.SYS}
4041 device drivers and boot loader software.
4043 You do \e{not} need to specify \c{BITS 32} merely in order to use
4044 32-bit instructions in a 16-bit DOS program; if you do, the
4045 assembler will generate incorrect code because it will be writing
4046 code targeted at a 32-bit platform, to be run on a 16-bit one.
4048 When NASM is in \c{BITS 16} mode, instructions which use 32-bit
4049 data are prefixed with an 0x66 byte, and those referring to 32-bit
4050 addresses have an 0x67 prefix. In \c{BITS 32} mode, the reverse is
4051 true: 32-bit instructions require no prefixes, whereas instructions
4052 using 16-bit data need an 0x66 and those working on 16-bit addresses
4055 When NASM is in \c{BITS 64} mode, most instructions operate the same
4056 as they do for \c{BITS 32} mode. However, there are 8 more general and
4057 SSE registers, and 16-bit addressing is no longer supported.
4059 The default address size is 64 bits; 32-bit addressing can be selected
4060 with the 0x67 prefix. The default operand size is still 32 bits,
4061 however, and the 0x66 prefix selects 16-bit operand size. The \c{REX}
4062 prefix is used both to select 64-bit operand size, and to access the
4063 new registers. NASM automatically inserts REX prefixes when
4066 When the \c{REX} prefix is used, the processor does not know how to
4067 address the AH, BH, CH or DH (high 8-bit legacy) registers. Instead,
4068 it is possible to access the the low 8-bits of the SP, BP SI and DI
4069 registers as SPL, BPL, SIL and DIL, respectively; but only when the
4072 The \c{BITS} directive has an exactly equivalent primitive form,
4073 \c{[BITS 16]}, \c{[BITS 32]} and \c{[BITS 64]}. The user-level form is
4074 a macro which has no function other than to call the primitive form.
4076 Note that the space is neccessary, e.g. \c{BITS32} will \e{not} work!
4078 \S{USE16 & USE32} \i\c{USE16} & \i\c{USE32}: Aliases for BITS
4080 The `\c{USE16}' and `\c{USE32}' directives can be used in place of
4081 `\c{BITS 16}' and `\c{BITS 32}', for compatibility with other assemblers.
4084 \H{default} \i\c{DEFAULT}: Change the assembler defaults
4086 The \c{DEFAULT} directive changes the assembler defaults. Normally,
4087 NASM defaults to a mode where the programmer is expected to explicitly
4088 specify most features directly. However, this is occationally
4089 obnoxious, as the explicit form is pretty much the only one one wishes
4092 Currently, the only \c{DEFAULT} that is settable is whether or not
4093 registerless instructions in 64-bit mode are \c{RIP}-relative or not.
4094 By default, they are absolute unless overridden with the \i\c{REL}
4095 specifier (see \k{effaddr}). However, if \c{DEFAULT REL} is
4096 specified, \c{REL} is default, unless overridden with the \c{ABS}
4097 specifier, \e{except when used with an FS or GS segment override}.
4099 The special handling of \c{FS} and \c{GS} overrides are due to the
4100 fact that these registers are generally used as thread pointers or
4101 other special functions in 64-bit mode, and generating
4102 \c{RIP}-relative addresses would be extremely confusing.
4104 \c{DEFAULT REL} is disabled with \c{DEFAULT ABS}.
4106 \H{section} \i\c{SECTION} or \i\c{SEGMENT}: Changing and \i{Defining
4109 \I{changing sections}\I{switching between sections}The \c{SECTION}
4110 directive (\c{SEGMENT} is an exactly equivalent synonym) changes
4111 which section of the output file the code you write will be
4112 assembled into. In some object file formats, the number and names of
4113 sections are fixed; in others, the user may make up as many as they
4114 wish. Hence \c{SECTION} may sometimes give an error message, or may
4115 define a new section, if you try to switch to a section that does
4118 The Unix object formats, and the \c{bin} object format (but see
4119 \k{multisec}, all support
4120 the \i{standardized section names} \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}
4121 for the code, data and uninitialized-data sections. The \c{obj}
4122 format, by contrast, does not recognize these section names as being
4123 special, and indeed will strip off the leading period of any section
4127 \S{sectmac} The \i\c{__SECT__} Macro
4129 The \c{SECTION} directive is unusual in that its user-level form
4130 functions differently from its primitive form. The primitive form,
4131 \c{[SECTION xyz]}, simply switches the current target section to the
4132 one given. The user-level form, \c{SECTION xyz}, however, first
4133 defines the single-line macro \c{__SECT__} to be the primitive
4134 \c{[SECTION]} directive which it is about to issue, and then issues
4135 it. So the user-level directive
4139 expands to the two lines
4141 \c %define __SECT__ [SECTION .text]
4144 Users may find it useful to make use of this in their own macros.
4145 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
4146 usefully rewritten in the following more sophisticated form:
4148 \c %macro writefile 2+
4158 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
4165 This form of the macro, once passed a string to output, first
4166 switches temporarily to the data section of the file, using the
4167 primitive form of the \c{SECTION} directive so as not to modify
4168 \c{__SECT__}. It then declares its string in the data section, and
4169 then invokes \c{__SECT__} to switch back to \e{whichever} section
4170 the user was previously working in. It thus avoids the need, in the
4171 previous version of the macro, to include a \c{JMP} instruction to
4172 jump over the data, and also does not fail if, in a complicated
4173 \c{OBJ} format module, the user could potentially be assembling the
4174 code in any of several separate code sections.
4177 \H{absolute} \i\c{ABSOLUTE}: Defining Absolute Labels
4179 The \c{ABSOLUTE} directive can be thought of as an alternative form
4180 of \c{SECTION}: it causes the subsequent code to be directed at no
4181 physical section, but at the hypothetical section starting at the
4182 given absolute address. The only instructions you can use in this
4183 mode are the \c{RESB} family.
4185 \c{ABSOLUTE} is used as follows:
4193 This example describes a section of the PC BIOS data area, at
4194 segment address 0x40: the above code defines \c{kbuf_chr} to be
4195 0x1A, \c{kbuf_free} to be 0x1C, and \c{kbuf} to be 0x1E.
4197 The user-level form of \c{ABSOLUTE}, like that of \c{SECTION},
4198 redefines the \i\c{__SECT__} macro when it is invoked.
4200 \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC} are defined as macros which use
4201 \c{ABSOLUTE} (and also \c{__SECT__}).
4203 \c{ABSOLUTE} doesn't have to take an absolute constant as an
4204 argument: it can take an expression (actually, a \i{critical
4205 expression}: see \k{crit}) and it can be a value in a segment. For
4206 example, a TSR can re-use its setup code as run-time BSS like this:
4208 \c org 100h ; it's a .COM program
4210 \c jmp setup ; setup code comes last
4212 \c ; the resident part of the TSR goes here
4214 \c ; now write the code that installs the TSR here
4218 \c runtimevar1 resw 1
4219 \c runtimevar2 resd 20
4223 This defines some variables `on top of' the setup code, so that
4224 after the setup has finished running, the space it took up can be
4225 re-used as data storage for the running TSR. The symbol `tsr_end'
4226 can be used to calculate the total size of the part of the TSR that
4227 needs to be made resident.
4230 \H{extern} \i\c{EXTERN}: \i{Importing Symbols} from Other Modules
4232 \c{EXTERN} is similar to the MASM directive \c{EXTRN} and the C
4233 keyword \c{extern}: it is used to declare a symbol which is not
4234 defined anywhere in the module being assembled, but is assumed to be
4235 defined in some other module and needs to be referred to by this
4236 one. Not every object-file format can support external variables:
4237 the \c{bin} format cannot.
4239 The \c{EXTERN} directive takes as many arguments as you like. Each
4240 argument is the name of a symbol:
4243 \c extern _sscanf,_fscanf
4245 Some object-file formats provide extra features to the \c{EXTERN}
4246 directive. In all cases, the extra features are used by suffixing a
4247 colon to the symbol name followed by object-format specific text.
4248 For example, the \c{obj} format allows you to declare that the
4249 default segment base of an external should be the group \c{dgroup}
4250 by means of the directive
4252 \c extern _variable:wrt dgroup
4254 The primitive form of \c{EXTERN} differs from the user-level form
4255 only in that it can take only one argument at a time: the support
4256 for multiple arguments is implemented at the preprocessor level.
4258 You can declare the same variable as \c{EXTERN} more than once: NASM
4259 will quietly ignore the second and later redeclarations. You can't
4260 declare a variable as \c{EXTERN} as well as something else, though.
4263 \H{global} \i\c{GLOBAL}: \i{Exporting Symbols} to Other Modules
4265 \c{GLOBAL} is the other end of \c{EXTERN}: if one module declares a
4266 symbol as \c{EXTERN} and refers to it, then in order to prevent
4267 linker errors, some other module must actually \e{define} the
4268 symbol and declare it as \c{GLOBAL}. Some assemblers use the name
4269 \i\c{PUBLIC} for this purpose.
4271 The \c{GLOBAL} directive applying to a symbol must appear \e{before}
4272 the definition of the symbol.
4274 \c{GLOBAL} uses the same syntax as \c{EXTERN}, except that it must
4275 refer to symbols which \e{are} defined in the same module as the
4276 \c{GLOBAL} directive. For example:
4282 \c{GLOBAL}, like \c{EXTERN}, allows object formats to define private
4283 extensions by means of a colon. The \c{elf} object format, for
4284 example, lets you specify whether global data items are functions or
4287 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
4289 Like \c{EXTERN}, the primitive form of \c{GLOBAL} differs from the
4290 user-level form only in that it can take only one argument at a
4294 \H{common} \i\c{COMMON}: Defining Common Data Areas
4296 The \c{COMMON} directive is used to declare \i\e{common variables}.
4297 A common variable is much like a global variable declared in the
4298 uninitialized data section, so that
4302 is similar in function to
4309 The difference is that if more than one module defines the same
4310 common variable, then at link time those variables will be
4311 \e{merged}, and references to \c{intvar} in all modules will point
4312 at the same piece of memory.
4314 Like \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN}, \c{COMMON} supports object-format
4315 specific extensions. For example, the \c{obj} format allows common
4316 variables to be NEAR or FAR, and the \c{elf} format allows you to
4317 specify the alignment requirements of a common variable:
4319 \c common commvar 4:near ; works in OBJ
4320 \c common intarray 100:4 ; works in ELF: 4 byte aligned
4322 Once again, like \c{EXTERN} and \c{GLOBAL}, the primitive form of
4323 \c{COMMON} differs from the user-level form only in that it can take
4324 only one argument at a time.
4327 \H{CPU} \i\c{CPU}: Defining CPU Dependencies
4329 The \i\c{CPU} directive restricts assembly to those instructions which
4330 are available on the specified CPU.
4334 \b\c{CPU 8086} Assemble only 8086 instruction set
4336 \b\c{CPU 186} Assemble instructions up to the 80186 instruction set
4338 \b\c{CPU 286} Assemble instructions up to the 286 instruction set
4340 \b\c{CPU 386} Assemble instructions up to the 386 instruction set
4342 \b\c{CPU 486} 486 instruction set
4344 \b\c{CPU 586} Pentium instruction set
4346 \b\c{CPU PENTIUM} Same as 586
4348 \b\c{CPU 686} P6 instruction set
4350 \b\c{CPU PPRO} Same as 686
4352 \b\c{CPU P2} Same as 686
4354 \b\c{CPU P3} Pentium III (Katmai) instruction sets
4356 \b\c{CPU KATMAI} Same as P3
4358 \b\c{CPU P4} Pentium 4 (Willamette) instruction set
4360 \b\c{CPU WILLAMETTE} Same as P4
4362 \b\c{CPU PRESCOTT} Prescott instruction set
4364 \b\c{CPU X64} x86-64 (x64/AMD64/Intel 64) instruction set
4366 \b\c{CPU IA64} IA64 CPU (in x86 mode) instruction set
4368 All options are case insensitive. All instructions will be selected
4369 only if they apply to the selected CPU or lower. By default, all
4370 instructions are available.
4373 \H{FLOAT} \i\c{FLOAT}: Handling of \I{floating-point, constants}floating-point constants
4375 By default, floating-point constants are rounded to nearest, and IEEE
4376 denormals are supported. The following options can be set to alter
4379 \b\c{FLOAT DAZ} Flush denormals to zero
4381 \b\c{FLOAT NODAZ} Do not flush denormals to zero (default)
4383 \b\c{FLOAT NEAR} Round to nearest (default)
4385 \b\c{FLOAT UP} Round up (toward +Infinity)
4387 \b\c{FLOAT DOWN} Round down (toward -Infinity)
4389 \b\c{FLOAT ZERO} Round toward zero
4391 \b\c{FLOAT DEFAULT} Restore default settings
4393 The standard macros \i\c{__FLOAT_DAZ__}, \i\c{__FLOAT_ROUND__}, and
4394 \i\c{__FLOAT__} contain the current state, as long as the programmer
4395 has avoided the use of the brackeded primitive form, (\c{[FLOAT]}).
4397 \c{__FLOAT__} contains the full set of floating-point settings; this
4398 value can be saved away and invoked later to restore the setting.
4401 \C{outfmt} \i{Output Formats}
4403 NASM is a portable assembler, designed to be able to compile on any
4404 ANSI C-supporting platform and produce output to run on a variety of
4405 Intel x86 operating systems. For this reason, it has a large number
4406 of available output formats, selected using the \i\c{-f} option on
4407 the NASM \i{command line}. Each of these formats, along with its
4408 extensions to the base NASM syntax, is detailed in this chapter.
4410 As stated in \k{opt-o}, NASM chooses a \i{default name} for your
4411 output file based on the input file name and the chosen output
4412 format. This will be generated by removing the \i{extension}
4413 (\c{.asm}, \c{.s}, or whatever you like to use) from the input file
4414 name, and substituting an extension defined by the output format.
4415 The extensions are given with each format below.
4418 \H{binfmt} \i\c{bin}: \i{Flat-Form Binary}\I{pure binary} Output
4420 The \c{bin} format does not produce object files: it generates
4421 nothing in the output file except the code you wrote. Such `pure
4422 binary' files are used by \i{MS-DOS}: \i\c{.COM} executables and
4423 \i\c{.SYS} device drivers are pure binary files. Pure binary output
4424 is also useful for \i{operating system} and \i{boot loader}
4427 The \c{bin} format supports \i{multiple section names}. For details of
4428 how nasm handles sections in the \c{bin} format, see \k{multisec}.
4430 Using the \c{bin} format puts NASM by default into 16-bit mode (see
4431 \k{bits}). In order to use \c{bin} to write 32-bit or 64-bit code,
4432 such as an OS kernel, you need to explicitly issue the \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 32}
4433 or \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 64} directive.
4435 \c{bin} has no default output file name extension: instead, it
4436 leaves your file name as it is once the original extension has been
4437 removed. Thus, the default is for NASM to assemble \c{binprog.asm}
4438 into a binary file called \c{binprog}.
4441 \S{org} \i\c{ORG}: Binary File \i{Program Origin}
4443 The \c{bin} format provides an additional directive to the list
4444 given in \k{directive}: \c{ORG}. The function of the \c{ORG}
4445 directive is to specify the origin address which NASM will assume
4446 the program begins at when it is loaded into memory.
4448 For example, the following code will generate the longword
4455 Unlike the \c{ORG} directive provided by MASM-compatible assemblers,
4456 which allows you to jump around in the object file and overwrite
4457 code you have already generated, NASM's \c{ORG} does exactly what
4458 the directive says: \e{origin}. Its sole function is to specify one
4459 offset which is added to all internal address references within the
4460 section; it does not permit any of the trickery that MASM's version
4461 does. See \k{proborg} for further comments.
4464 \S{binseg} \c{bin} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
4465 Directive\I{SECTION, bin extensions to}
4467 The \c{bin} output format extends the \c{SECTION} (or \c{SEGMENT})
4468 directive to allow you to specify the alignment requirements of
4469 segments. This is done by appending the \i\c{ALIGN} qualifier to the
4470 end of the section-definition line. For example,
4472 \c section .data align=16
4474 switches to the section \c{.data} and also specifies that it must be
4475 aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4477 The parameter to \c{ALIGN} specifies how many low bits of the
4478 section start address must be forced to zero. The alignment value
4479 given may be any power of two.\I{section alignment, in
4480 bin}\I{segment alignment, in bin}\I{alignment, in bin sections}
4483 \S{multisec} \i\c{Multisection}\I{bin, multisection} support for the BIN format.
4485 The \c{bin} format allows the use of multiple sections, of arbitrary names,
4486 besides the "known" \c{.text}, \c{.data}, and \c{.bss} names.
4488 \b Sections may be designated \i\c{progbits} or \i\c{nobits}. Default
4489 is \c{progbits} (except \c{.bss}, which defaults to \c{nobits},
4492 \b Sections can be aligned at a specified boundary following the previous
4493 section with \c{align=}, or at an arbitrary byte-granular position with
4496 \b Sections can be given a virtual start address, which will be used
4497 for the calculation of all memory references within that section
4500 \b Sections can be ordered using \i\c{follows=}\c{<section>} or
4501 \i\c{vfollows=}\c{<section>} as an alternative to specifying an explicit
4504 \b Arguments to \c{org}, \c{start}, \c{vstart}, and \c{align=} are
4505 critical expressions. See \k{crit}. E.g. \c{align=(1 << ALIGN_SHIFT)}
4506 - \c{ALIGN_SHIFT} must be defined before it is used here.
4508 \b Any code which comes before an explicit \c{SECTION} directive
4509 is directed by default into the \c{.text} section.
4511 \b If an \c{ORG} statement is not given, \c{ORG 0} is used
4514 \b The \c{.bss} section will be placed after the last \c{progbits}
4515 section, unless \c{start=}, \c{vstart=}, \c{follows=}, or \c{vfollows=}
4518 \b All sections are aligned on dword boundaries, unless a different
4519 alignment has been specified.
4521 \b Sections may not overlap.
4523 \b NASM creates the \c{section.<secname>.start} for each section,
4524 which may be used in your code.
4526 \S{map}\i{Map files}
4528 Map files can be generated in \c{-f bin} format by means of the \c{[map]}
4529 option. Map types of \c{all} (default), \c{brief}, \c{sections}, \c{segments},
4530 or \c{symbols} may be specified. Output may be directed to \c{stdout}
4531 (default), \c{stderr}, or a specified file. E.g.
4532 \c{[map symbols myfile.map]}. No "user form" exists, the square
4533 brackets must be used.
4536 \H{objfmt} \i\c{obj}: \i{Microsoft OMF}\I{OMF} Object Files
4538 The \c{obj} file format (NASM calls it \c{obj} rather than \c{omf}
4539 for historical reasons) is the one produced by \i{MASM} and
4540 \i{TASM}, which is typically fed to 16-bit DOS linkers to produce
4541 \i\c{.EXE} files. It is also the format used by \i{OS/2}.
4543 \c{obj} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
4545 \c{obj} is not exclusively a 16-bit format, though: NASM has full
4546 support for the 32-bit extensions to the format. In particular,
4547 32-bit \c{obj} format files are used by \i{Borland's Win32
4548 compilers}, instead of using Microsoft's newer \i\c{win32} object
4551 The \c{obj} format does not define any special segment names: you
4552 can call your segments anything you like. Typical names for segments
4553 in \c{obj} format files are \c{CODE}, \c{DATA} and \c{BSS}.
4555 If your source file contains code before specifying an explicit
4556 \c{SEGMENT} directive, then NASM will invent its own segment called
4557 \i\c{__NASMDEFSEG} for you.
4559 When you define a segment in an \c{obj} file, NASM defines the
4560 segment name as a symbol as well, so that you can access the segment
4561 address of the segment. So, for example:
4570 \c mov ax,data ; get segment address of data
4571 \c mov ds,ax ; and move it into DS
4572 \c inc word [dvar] ; now this reference will work
4575 The \c{obj} format also enables the use of the \i\c{SEG} and
4576 \i\c{WRT} operators, so that you can write code which does things
4581 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment of foo
4583 \c mov ax,data ; a different segment
4585 \c mov ax,[ds:foo] ; this accesses `foo'
4586 \c mov [es:foo wrt data],bx ; so does this
4589 \S{objseg} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{SEGMENT}
4590 Directive\I{SEGMENT, obj extensions to}
4592 The \c{obj} output format extends the \c{SEGMENT} (or \c{SECTION})
4593 directive to allow you to specify various properties of the segment
4594 you are defining. This is done by appending extra qualifiers to the
4595 end of the segment-definition line. For example,
4597 \c segment code private align=16
4599 defines the segment \c{code}, but also declares it to be a private
4600 segment, and requires that the portion of it described in this code
4601 module must be aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4603 The available qualifiers are:
4605 \b \i\c{PRIVATE}, \i\c{PUBLIC}, \i\c{COMMON} and \i\c{STACK} specify
4606 the combination characteristics of the segment. \c{PRIVATE} segments
4607 do not get combined with any others by the linker; \c{PUBLIC} and
4608 \c{STACK} segments get concatenated together at link time; and
4609 \c{COMMON} segments all get overlaid on top of each other rather
4610 than stuck end-to-end.
4612 \b \i\c{ALIGN} is used, as shown above, to specify how many low bits
4613 of the segment start address must be forced to zero. The alignment
4614 value given may be any power of two from 1 to 4096; in reality, the
4615 only values supported are 1, 2, 4, 16, 256 and 4096, so if 8 is
4616 specified it will be rounded up to 16, and 32, 64 and 128 will all
4617 be rounded up to 256, and so on. Note that alignment to 4096-byte
4618 boundaries is a \i{PharLap} extension to the format and may not be
4619 supported by all linkers.\I{section alignment, in OBJ}\I{segment
4620 alignment, in OBJ}\I{alignment, in OBJ sections}
4622 \b \i\c{CLASS} can be used to specify the segment class; this feature
4623 indicates to the linker that segments of the same class should be
4624 placed near each other in the output file. The class name can be any
4625 word, e.g. \c{CLASS=CODE}.
4627 \b \i\c{OVERLAY}, like \c{CLASS}, is specified with an arbitrary word
4628 as an argument, and provides overlay information to an
4629 overlay-capable linker.
4631 \b Segments can be declared as \i\c{USE16} or \i\c{USE32}, which has
4632 the effect of recording the choice in the object file and also
4633 ensuring that NASM's default assembly mode when assembling in that
4634 segment is 16-bit or 32-bit respectively.
4636 \b When writing \i{OS/2} object files, you should declare 32-bit
4637 segments as \i\c{FLAT}, which causes the default segment base for
4638 anything in the segment to be the special group \c{FLAT}, and also
4639 defines the group if it is not already defined.
4641 \b The \c{obj} file format also allows segments to be declared as
4642 having a pre-defined absolute segment address, although no linkers
4643 are currently known to make sensible use of this feature;
4644 nevertheless, NASM allows you to declare a segment such as
4645 \c{SEGMENT SCREEN ABSOLUTE=0xB800} if you need to. The \i\c{ABSOLUTE}
4646 and \c{ALIGN} keywords are mutually exclusive.
4648 NASM's default segment attributes are \c{PUBLIC}, \c{ALIGN=1}, no
4649 class, no overlay, and \c{USE16}.
4652 \S{group} \i\c{GROUP}: Defining Groups of Segments\I{segments, groups of}
4654 The \c{obj} format also allows segments to be grouped, so that a
4655 single segment register can be used to refer to all the segments in
4656 a group. NASM therefore supplies the \c{GROUP} directive, whereby
4665 \c ; some uninitialized data
4667 \c group dgroup data bss
4669 which will define a group called \c{dgroup} to contain the segments
4670 \c{data} and \c{bss}. Like \c{SEGMENT}, \c{GROUP} causes the group
4671 name to be defined as a symbol, so that you can refer to a variable
4672 \c{var} in the \c{data} segment as \c{var wrt data} or as \c{var wrt
4673 dgroup}, depending on which segment value is currently in your
4676 If you just refer to \c{var}, however, and \c{var} is declared in a
4677 segment which is part of a group, then NASM will default to giving
4678 you the offset of \c{var} from the beginning of the \e{group}, not
4679 the \e{segment}. Therefore \c{SEG var}, also, will return the group
4680 base rather than the segment base.
4682 NASM will allow a segment to be part of more than one group, but
4683 will generate a warning if you do this. Variables declared in a
4684 segment which is part of more than one group will default to being
4685 relative to the first group that was defined to contain the segment.
4687 A group does not have to contain any segments; you can still make
4688 \c{WRT} references to a group which does not contain the variable
4689 you are referring to. OS/2, for example, defines the special group
4690 \c{FLAT} with no segments in it.
4693 \S{uppercase} \i\c{UPPERCASE}: Disabling Case Sensitivity in Output
4695 Although NASM itself is \i{case sensitive}, some OMF linkers are
4696 not; therefore it can be useful for NASM to output single-case
4697 object files. The \c{UPPERCASE} format-specific directive causes all
4698 segment, group and symbol names that are written to the object file
4699 to be forced to upper case just before being written. Within a
4700 source file, NASM is still case-sensitive; but the object file can
4701 be written entirely in upper case if desired.
4703 \c{UPPERCASE} is used alone on a line; it requires no parameters.
4706 \S{import} \i\c{IMPORT}: Importing DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
4707 importing}\I{symbols, importing from DLLs}
4709 The \c{IMPORT} format-specific directive defines a symbol to be
4710 imported from a DLL, for use if you are writing a DLL's \i{import
4711 library} in NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{EXTERN}
4712 as well as using the \c{IMPORT} directive.
4714 The \c{IMPORT} directive takes two required parameters, separated by
4715 white space, which are (respectively) the name of the symbol you
4716 wish to import and the name of the library you wish to import it
4719 \c import WSAStartup wsock32.dll
4721 A third optional parameter gives the name by which the symbol is
4722 known in the library you are importing it from, in case this is not
4723 the same as the name you wish the symbol to be known by to your code
4724 once you have imported it. For example:
4726 \c import asyncsel wsock32.dll WSAAsyncSelect
4729 \S{export} \i\c{EXPORT}: Exporting DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
4730 exporting}\I{symbols, exporting from DLLs}
4732 The \c{EXPORT} format-specific directive defines a global symbol to
4733 be exported as a DLL symbol, for use if you are writing a DLL in
4734 NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{GLOBAL} as well as
4735 using the \c{EXPORT} directive.
4737 \c{EXPORT} takes one required parameter, which is the name of the
4738 symbol you wish to export, as it was defined in your source file. An
4739 optional second parameter (separated by white space from the first)
4740 gives the \e{external} name of the symbol: the name by which you
4741 wish the symbol to be known to programs using the DLL. If this name
4742 is the same as the internal name, you may leave the second parameter
4745 Further parameters can be given to define attributes of the exported
4746 symbol. These parameters, like the second, are separated by white
4747 space. If further parameters are given, the external name must also
4748 be specified, even if it is the same as the internal name. The
4749 available attributes are:
4751 \b \c{resident} indicates that the exported name is to be kept
4752 resident by the system loader. This is an optimisation for
4753 frequently used symbols imported by name.
4755 \b \c{nodata} indicates that the exported symbol is a function which
4756 does not make use of any initialized data.
4758 \b \c{parm=NNN}, where \c{NNN} is an integer, sets the number of
4759 parameter words for the case in which the symbol is a call gate
4760 between 32-bit and 16-bit segments.
4762 \b An attribute which is just a number indicates that the symbol
4763 should be exported with an identifying number (ordinal), and gives
4769 \c export myfunc TheRealMoreFormalLookingFunctionName
4770 \c export myfunc myfunc 1234 ; export by ordinal
4771 \c export myfunc myfunc resident parm=23 nodata
4774 \S{dotdotstart} \i\c{..start}: Defining the \i{Program Entry
4777 \c{OMF} linkers require exactly one of the object files being linked to
4778 define the program entry point, where execution will begin when the
4779 program is run. If the object file that defines the entry point is
4780 assembled using NASM, you specify the entry point by declaring the
4781 special symbol \c{..start} at the point where you wish execution to
4785 \S{objextern} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN}
4786 Directive\I{EXTERN, obj extensions to}
4788 If you declare an external symbol with the directive
4792 then references such as \c{mov ax,foo} will give you the offset of
4793 \c{foo} from its preferred segment base (as specified in whichever
4794 module \c{foo} is actually defined in). So to access the contents of
4795 \c{foo} you will usually need to do something like
4797 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment base
4798 \c mov es,ax ; move it into ES
4799 \c mov ax,[es:foo] ; and use offset `foo' from it
4801 This is a little unwieldy, particularly if you know that an external
4802 is going to be accessible from a given segment or group, say
4803 \c{dgroup}. So if \c{DS} already contained \c{dgroup}, you could
4806 \c mov ax,[foo wrt dgroup]
4808 However, having to type this every time you want to access \c{foo}
4809 can be a pain; so NASM allows you to declare \c{foo} in the
4812 \c extern foo:wrt dgroup
4814 This form causes NASM to pretend that the preferred segment base of
4815 \c{foo} is in fact \c{dgroup}; so the expression \c{seg foo} will
4816 now return \c{dgroup}, and the expression \c{foo} is equivalent to
4819 This \I{default-WRT mechanism}default-\c{WRT} mechanism can be used
4820 to make externals appear to be relative to any group or segment in
4821 your program. It can also be applied to common variables: see
4825 \S{objcommon} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{COMMON}
4826 Directive\I{COMMON, obj extensions to}
4828 The \c{obj} format allows common variables to be either near\I{near
4829 common variables} or far\I{far common variables}; NASM allows you to
4830 specify which your variables should be by the use of the syntax
4832 \c common nearvar 2:near ; `nearvar' is a near common
4833 \c common farvar 10:far ; and `farvar' is far
4835 Far common variables may be greater in size than 64Kb, and so the
4836 OMF specification says that they are declared as a number of
4837 \e{elements} of a given size. So a 10-byte far common variable could
4838 be declared as ten one-byte elements, five two-byte elements, two
4839 five-byte elements or one ten-byte element.
4841 Some \c{OMF} linkers require the \I{element size, in common
4842 variables}\I{common variables, element size}element size, as well as
4843 the variable size, to match when resolving common variables declared
4844 in more than one module. Therefore NASM must allow you to specify
4845 the element size on your far common variables. This is done by the
4848 \c common c_5by2 10:far 5 ; two five-byte elements
4849 \c common c_2by5 10:far 2 ; five two-byte elements
4851 If no element size is specified, the default is 1. Also, the \c{FAR}
4852 keyword is not required when an element size is specified, since
4853 only far commons may have element sizes at all. So the above
4854 declarations could equivalently be
4856 \c common c_5by2 10:5 ; two five-byte elements
4857 \c common c_2by5 10:2 ; five two-byte elements
4859 In addition to these extensions, the \c{COMMON} directive in \c{obj}
4860 also supports default-\c{WRT} specification like \c{EXTERN} does
4861 (explained in \k{objextern}). So you can also declare things like
4863 \c common foo 10:wrt dgroup
4864 \c common bar 16:far 2:wrt data
4865 \c common baz 24:wrt data:6
4868 \H{win32fmt} \i\c{win32}: Microsoft Win32 Object Files
4870 The \c{win32} output format generates Microsoft Win32 object files,
4871 suitable for passing to Microsoft linkers such as \i{Visual C++}.
4872 Note that Borland Win32 compilers do not use this format, but use
4873 \c{obj} instead (see \k{objfmt}).
4875 \c{win32} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
4877 Note that although Microsoft say that Win32 object files follow the
4878 \c{COFF} (Common Object File Format) standard, the object files produced
4879 by Microsoft Win32 compilers are not compatible with COFF linkers
4880 such as DJGPP's, and vice versa. This is due to a difference of
4881 opinion over the precise semantics of PC-relative relocations. To
4882 produce COFF files suitable for DJGPP, use NASM's \c{coff} output
4883 format; conversely, the \c{coff} format does not produce object
4884 files that Win32 linkers can generate correct output from.
4887 \S{win32sect} \c{win32} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
4888 Directive\I{SECTION, win32 extensions to}
4890 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{win32} allows you to specify additional
4891 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
4892 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
4893 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section names}
4894 \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}, but may still be overridden by
4897 The available qualifiers are:
4899 \b \c{code}, or equivalently \c{text}, defines the section to be a
4900 code section. This marks the section as readable and executable, but
4901 not writable, and also indicates to the linker that the type of the
4904 \b \c{data} and \c{bss} define the section to be a data section,
4905 analogously to \c{code}. Data sections are marked as readable and
4906 writable, but not executable. \c{data} declares an initialized data
4907 section, whereas \c{bss} declares an uninitialized data section.
4909 \b \c{rdata} declares an initialized data section that is readable
4910 but not writable. Microsoft compilers use this section to place
4913 \b \c{info} defines the section to be an \i{informational section},
4914 which is not included in the executable file by the linker, but may
4915 (for example) pass information \e{to} the linker. For example,
4916 declaring an \c{info}-type section called \i\c{.drectve} causes the
4917 linker to interpret the contents of the section as command-line
4920 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
4921 \I{section alignment, in win32}\I{alignment, in win32
4922 sections}alignment requirements of the section. The maximum you may
4923 specify is 64: the Win32 object file format contains no means to
4924 request a greater section alignment than this. If alignment is not
4925 explicitly specified, the defaults are 16-byte alignment for code
4926 sections, 8-byte alignment for rdata sections and 4-byte alignment
4927 for data (and BSS) sections.
4928 Informational sections get a default alignment of 1 byte (no
4929 alignment), though the value does not matter.
4931 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
4934 \c section .text code align=16
4935 \c section .data data align=4
4936 \c section .rdata rdata align=8
4937 \c section .bss bss align=4
4939 Any other section name is treated by default like \c{.text}.
4941 \S{win32safeseh} \c{win32}: Safe Structured Exception Handling
4943 Among other improvements in Windows XP SP2 and Windows Server 2003
4944 Microsoft has introduced concept of "safe structured exception
4945 handling." General idea is to collect handlers' entry points in
4946 designated read-only table and have alleged entry point verified
4947 against this table prior exception control is passed to the handler. In
4948 order for an executable module to be equipped with such "safe exception
4949 handler table," all object modules on linker command line has to comply
4950 with certain criteria. If one single module among them does not, then
4951 the table in question is omitted and above mentioned run-time checks
4952 will not be performed for application in question. Table omission is by
4953 default silent and therefore can be easily overlooked. One can instruct
4954 linker to refuse to produce binary without such table by passing
4955 \c{/safeseh} command line option.
4957 Without regard to this run-time check merits it's natural to expect
4958 NASM to be capable of generating modules suitable for \c{/safeseh}
4959 linking. From developer's viewpoint the problem is two-fold:
4961 \b how to adapt modules not deploying exception handlers of their own;
4963 \b how to adapt/develop modules utilizing custom exception handling;
4965 Former can be easily achieved with any NASM version by adding following
4966 line to source code:
4970 As of version 2.03 NASM adds this absolute symbol automatically. If
4971 it's not already present to be precise. I.e. if for whatever reason
4972 developer would choose to assign another value in source file, it would
4973 still be perfectly possible.
4975 Registering custom exception handler on the other hand requires certain
4976 "magic." As of version 2.03 additional directive is implemented,
4977 \c{safeseh}, which instructs the assembler to produce appropriately
4978 formatted input data for above mentioned "safe exception handler
4979 table." Its typical use would be:
4982 \c extern _MessageBoxA@16
4983 \c %if __NASM_VERSION_ID__ >= 0x02030000
4984 \c safeseh handler ; register handler as "safe handler"
4987 \c push DWORD 1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
4988 \c push DWORD caption
4991 \c call _MessageBoxA@16
4992 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
4993 \c ; for exception handler
4997 \c push DWORD handler
4998 \c push DWORD [fs:0]
4999 \c mov DWORD [fs:0],esp ; engage exception handler
5001 \c mov eax,DWORD[eax] ; cause exception
5002 \c pop DWORD [fs:0] ; disengage exception handler
5005 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5006 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5008 \c section .drectve info
5009 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5011 As you might imagine, it's perfectly possible to produce .exe binary
5012 with "safe exception handler table" and yet engage unregistered
5013 exception handler. Indeed, handler is engaged by simply manipulating
5014 \c{[fs:0]} location at run-time, something linker has no power over,
5015 run-time that is. It should be explicitly mentioned that such failure
5016 to register handler's entry point with \c{safeseh} directive has
5017 undesired side effect at run-time. If exception is raised and
5018 unregistered handler is to be executed, the application is abruptly
5019 terminated without any notification whatsoever. One can argue that
5020 system could at least have logged some kind "non-safe exception
5021 handler in x.exe at address n" message in event log, but no, literally
5022 no notification is provided and user is left with no clue on what
5023 caused application failure.
5025 Finally, all mentions of linker in this paragraph refer to Microsoft
5026 linker version 7.x and later. Presence of \c{@feat.00} symbol and input
5027 data for "safe exception handler table" causes no backward
5028 incompatibilities and "safeseh" modules generated by NASM 2.03 and
5029 later can still be linked by earlier versions or non-Microsoft linkers.
5032 \H{win64fmt} \i\c{win64}: Microsoft Win64 Object Files
5034 The \c{win64} output format generates Microsoft Win64 object files,
5035 which is nearly 100% identical to the \c{win32} object format (\k{win32fmt})
5036 with the exception that it is meant to target 64-bit code and the x86-64
5037 platform altogether. This object file is used exactly the same as the \c{win32}
5038 object format (\k{win32fmt}), in NASM, with regard to this exception.
5040 \S{win64pic} \c{win64}: Writing Position-Independent Code
5042 While \c{REL} takes good care of RIP-relative addressing, there is one
5043 aspect that is easy to overlook for a Win64 programmer: indirect
5044 references. Consider a switch dispatch table:
5046 \c jmp QWORD[dsptch+rax*8]
5052 Even novice Win64 assembler programmer will soon realize that the code
5053 is not 64-bit savvy. Most notably linker will refuse to link it with
5054 "\c{'ADDR32' relocation to '.text' invalid without
5055 /LARGEADDRESSAWARE:NO}". So [s]he will have to split jmp instruction as
5058 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5059 \c jmp QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5061 What happens behind the scene is that effective address in \c{lea} is
5062 encoded relative to instruction pointer, or in perfectly
5063 position-independent manner. But this is only part of the problem!
5064 Trouble is that in .dll context \c{caseN} relocations will make their
5065 way to the final module and might have to be adjusted at .dll load
5066 time. To be specific when it can't be loaded at preferred address. And
5067 when this occurs, pages with such relocations will be rendered private
5068 to current process, which kind of undermines the idea of sharing .dll.
5069 But no worry, it's trivial to fix:
5071 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5072 \c add rbx,QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5075 \c dsptch: dq case0-dsptch
5079 NASM version 2.03 and later provides another alternative, \c{wrt
5080 ..imagebase} operator, which returns offset from base address of the
5081 current image, be it .exe or .dll module, therefore the name. For those
5082 acquainted with PE-COFF format base address denotes start of
5083 \c{IMAGE_DOS_HEADER} structure. Here is how to implement switch with
5084 these image-relative references:
5086 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5087 \c mov eax,DWORD[rbx+rax*4]
5088 \c sub rbx,dsptch wrt ..imagebase
5092 \c dsptch: dd case0 wrt ..imagebase
5093 \c dd case1 wrt ..imagebase
5095 One can argue that the operator is redundant. Indeed, snippet before
5096 last works just fine with any NASM version and is not even Windows
5097 specific... The real reason for implementing \c{wrt ..imagebase} will
5098 become apparent in next paragraph.
5100 It should be noted that \c{wrt ..imagebase} is defined as 32-bit
5103 \c dd label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5104 \c dq label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5105 \c mov eax,label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5106 \c mov rax,label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5108 \S{win64seh} \c{win64}: Structured Exception Handling
5110 Structured exception handing in Win64 is completely different matter
5111 from Win32. Upon exception program counter value is noted, and
5112 linker-generated table comprising start and end addresses of all the
5113 functions [in given executable module] is traversed and compared to the
5114 saved program counter. Thus so called \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5115 identified. If it's not found, then offending subroutine is assumed to
5116 be "leaf" and just mentioned lookup procedure is attempted for its
5117 caller. In Win64 leaf function is such function that does not call any
5118 other function \e{nor} modifies any Win64 non-volatile registers,
5119 including stack pointer. The latter ensures that it's possible to
5120 identify leaf function's caller by simply pulling the value from the
5123 While majority of subroutines written in assembler are not calling any
5124 other function, requirement for non-volatile registers' immutability
5125 leaves developer with not more than 7 registers and no stack frame,
5126 which is not necessarily what [s]he counted with. Customarily one would
5127 meet the requirement by saving non-volatile registers on stack and
5128 restoring them upon return, so what can go wrong? If [and only if] an
5129 exception is raised at run-time and no \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5130 associated with such "leaf" function, the stack unwind procedure will
5131 expect to find caller's return address on the top of stack immediately
5132 followed by its frame. Given that developer pushed caller's
5133 non-volatile registers on stack, would the value on top point at some
5134 code segment or even addressable space? Well, developer can attempt
5135 copying caller's return address to the top of stack and this would
5136 actually work in some very specific circumstances. But unless developer
5137 can guarantee that these circumstances are always met, it's more
5138 appropriate to assume worst case scenario, i.e. stack unwind procedure
5139 going berserk. Relevant question is what happens then? Application is
5140 abruptly terminated without any notification whatsoever. Just like in
5141 Win32 case, one can argue that system could at least have logged
5142 "unwind procedure went berserk in x.exe at address n" in event log, but
5143 no, no trace of failure is left.
5145 Now, when we understand significance of the \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure,
5146 let's discuss what's in it and/or how it's processed. First of all it
5147 is checked for presence of reference to custom language-specific
5148 exception handler. If there is one, then it's invoked. Depending on the
5149 return value, execution flow is resumed (exception is said to be
5150 "handled"), \e{or} rest of \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is processed as
5151 following. Beside optional reference to custom handler, it carries
5152 information about current callee's stack frame and where non-volatile
5153 registers are saved. Information is detailed enough to be able to
5154 reconstruct contents of caller's non-volatile registers upon call to
5155 current callee. And so caller's context is reconstructed, and then
5156 unwind procedure is repeated, i.e. another \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5157 associated, this time, with caller's instruction pointer, which is then
5158 checked for presence of reference to language-specific handler, etc.
5159 The procedure is recursively repeated till exception is handled. As
5160 last resort system "handles" it by generating memory core dump and
5161 terminating the application.
5163 As for the moment of this writing NASM unfortunately does not
5164 facilitate generation of above mentioned detailed information about
5165 stack frame layout. But as of version 2.03 it implements building
5166 blocks for generating structures involved in stack unwinding. As
5167 simplest example, here is how to deploy custom exception handler for
5172 \c extern MessageBoxA
5178 \c mov r9,1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5180 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5181 \c ; for exception handler
5187 \c mov rax,QWORD[rax] ; cause exception
5190 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5191 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5193 \c section .pdata rdata align=4
5194 \c dd main wrt ..imagebase
5195 \c dd main_end wrt ..imagebase
5196 \c dd xmain wrt ..imagebase
5197 \c section .xdata rdata align=8
5198 \c xmain: db 9,0,0,0
5199 \c dd handler wrt ..imagebase
5200 \c section .drectve info
5201 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5203 What you see in \c{.pdata} section is element of the "table comprising
5204 start and end addresses of function" along with reference to associated
5205 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure. And what you see in \c{.xdata} section is
5206 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure describing function with no frame, but with
5207 designated exception handler. References are \e{required} to be
5208 image-relative (which is the real reason for implementing \c{wrt
5209 ..imagebase} operator). It should be noted that \c{rdata align=n}, as
5210 well as \c{wrt ..imagebase}, are optional in these two segments'
5211 contexts, i.e. can be omitted. Latter means that \e{all} 32-bit
5212 references, not only above listed required ones, placed into these two
5213 segments turn out image-relative. Why is it important to understand?
5214 Developer is allowed to append handler-specific data to \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5215 structure, and if [s]he adds a 32-bit reference, then [s]he will have
5216 to remember to adjust its value to obtain the real pointer.
5218 As already mentioned, in Win64 terms leaf function is one that does not
5219 call any other function \e{nor} modifies any non-volatile register,
5220 including stack pointer. But it's not uncommon that assembler
5221 programmer plans to utilize every single register and sometimes even
5222 have variable stack frame. Is there anything one can do with bare
5223 building blocks? I.e. besides manually composing fully-fledged
5224 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure, which would surely be considered
5225 error-prone? Yes, there is. Recall that exception handler is called
5226 first, before stack layout is analyzed. As it turned out, it's
5227 perfectly possible to manipulate current callee's context in custom
5228 handler in manner that permits further stack unwinding. General idea is
5229 that handler would not actually "handle" the exception, but instead
5230 restore callee's context, as it was at its entry point and thus mimic
5231 leaf function. In other words, handler would simply undertake part of
5232 unwinding procedure. Consider following example:
5235 \c mov rax,rsp ; copy rsp to volatile register
5236 \c push r15 ; save non-volatile registers
5239 \c mov r11,rsp ; prepare variable stack frame
5242 \c mov QWORD[r11],rax ; check for exceptions
5243 \c mov rsp,r11 ; allocate stack frame
5244 \c mov QWORD[rsp],rax ; save original rsp value
5247 \c mov r11,QWORD[rsp] ; pull original rsp value
5248 \c mov rbp,QWORD[r11-24]
5249 \c mov rbx,QWORD[r11-16]
5250 \c mov r15,QWORD[r11-8]
5251 \c mov rsp,r11 ; destroy frame
5254 The keyword is that up to \c{magic_point} original \c{rsp} value
5255 remains in chosen volatile register and no non-volatile register,
5256 except for \c{rsp}, is modified. While past \c{magic_point} \c{rsp}
5257 remains constant till the very end of the \c{function}. In this case
5258 custom language-specific exception handler would look like this:
5260 \c EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION handler (EXCEPTION_RECORD *rec,ULONG64 frame,
5261 \c CONTEXT *context,DISPATCHER_CONTEXT *disp)
5263 \c if (context->Rip<(ULONG64)magic_point)
5264 \c rsp = (ULONG64 *)context->Rax;
5266 \c { rsp = ((ULONG64 **)context->Rsp)[0];
5267 \c context->Rbp = rsp[-3];
5268 \c context->Rbx = rsp[-2];
5269 \c context->R15 = rsp[-1];
5271 \c context->Rsp = (ULONG64)rsp;
5273 \c memcpy (disp->ContextRecord,context,sizeof(CONTEXT));
5274 \c RtlVirtualUnwind(UNW_FLAG_NHANDLER,disp->ImageBase,
5275 \c dips->ControlPc,disp->FunctionEntry,disp->ContextRecord,
5276 \c &disp->HandlerData,&disp->EstablisherFrame,NULL);
5277 \c return ExceptionContinueSearch;
5280 As custom handler mimics leaf function, corresponding \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5281 structure does not have to contain any information about stack frame
5284 \H{cofffmt} \i\c{coff}: \i{Common Object File Format}
5286 The \c{coff} output type produces \c{COFF} object files suitable for
5287 linking with the \i{DJGPP} linker.
5289 \c{coff} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5291 The \c{coff} format supports the same extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5292 directive as \c{win32} does, except that the \c{align} qualifier and
5293 the \c{info} section type are not supported.
5295 \H{machofmt} \i\c{macho}: \i{Mach Object File Format}
5297 The \c{macho} output type produces \c{Mach-O} object files suitable for
5298 linking with the \i{Mac OSX} linker.
5300 \c{macho} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5302 \H{elffmt} \i\c{elf, elf32, and elf64}: \I{ELF}\I{linux, elf}\i{Executable and Linkable
5303 Format} Object Files
5305 The \c{elf32} and \c{elf64} output formats generate \c{ELF32 and ELF64} (Executable and Linkable Format) object files, as used by Linux as well as \i{Unix System V},
5306 including \i{Solaris x86}, \i{UnixWare} and \i{SCO Unix}. \c{elf}
5307 provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5308 \c{elf} is a synonym for \c{elf32}.
5310 \S{abisect} ELF specific directive \i\c{osabi}
5312 The ELF header specifies the application binary interface for the target operating system (OSABI).
5313 This field can be set by using the \c{osabi} directive with the numeric value (0-255) of the target
5314 system. If this directive is not used, the default value will be "UNIX System V ABI" (0) which will work on
5315 most systems which support ELF.
5317 \S{elfsect} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5318 Directive\I{SECTION, elf extensions to}
5320 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{elf} allows you to specify additional
5321 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5322 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5323 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section
5324 names}, but may still be
5325 overridden by these qualifiers.
5327 The available qualifiers are:
5329 \b \i\c{alloc} defines the section to be one which is loaded into
5330 memory when the program is run. \i\c{noalloc} defines it to be one
5331 which is not, such as an informational or comment section.
5333 \b \i\c{exec} defines the section to be one which should have execute
5334 permission when the program is run. \i\c{noexec} defines it as one
5337 \b \i\c{write} defines the section to be one which should be writable
5338 when the program is run. \i\c{nowrite} defines it as one which should
5341 \b \i\c{progbits} defines the section to be one with explicit contents
5342 stored in the object file: an ordinary code or data section, for
5343 example, \i\c{nobits} defines the section to be one with no explicit
5344 contents given, such as a BSS section.
5346 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5347 \I{section alignment, in elf}\I{alignment, in elf sections}alignment
5348 requirements of the section.
5350 \b \i\c{tls} defines the section to be one which contains
5351 thread local variables.
5353 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5356 \I\c{.text} \I\c{.rodata} \I\c{.lrodata} \I\c{.data} \I\c{.ldata}
5357 \I\c{.bss} \I\c{.lbss} \I\c{.tdata} \I\c{.tbss} \I\c\{.comment}
5359 \c section .text progbits alloc exec nowrite align=16
5360 \c section .rodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5361 \c section .lrodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5362 \c section .data progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5363 \c section .ldata progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5364 \c section .bss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5365 \c section .lbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5366 \c section .tdata progbits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5367 \c section .tbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5368 \c section .comment progbits noalloc noexec nowrite align=1
5369 \c section other progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=1
5371 (Any section name other than those in the above table
5372 is treated by default like \c{other} in the above table.
5373 Please note that section names are case sensitive.)
5376 \S{elfwrt} \i{Position-Independent Code}\I{PIC}: \c{elf} Special
5377 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5379 The \c{ELF} specification contains enough features to allow
5380 position-independent code (PIC) to be written, which makes \i{ELF
5381 shared libraries} very flexible. However, it also means NASM has to
5382 be able to generate a variety of ELF specific relocation types in ELF
5383 object files, if it is to be an assembler which can write PIC.
5385 Since \c{ELF} does not support segment-base references, the \c{WRT}
5386 operator is not used for its normal purpose; therefore NASM's
5387 \c{elf} output format makes use of \c{WRT} for a different purpose,
5388 namely the PIC-specific \I{relocations, PIC-specific}relocation
5391 \c{elf} defines five special symbols which you can use as the
5392 right-hand side of the \c{WRT} operator to obtain PIC relocation
5393 types. They are \i\c{..gotpc}, \i\c{..gotoff}, \i\c{..got},
5394 \i\c{..plt} and \i\c{..sym}. Their functions are summarized here:
5396 \b Referring to the symbol marking the global offset table base
5397 using \c{wrt ..gotpc} will end up giving the distance from the
5398 beginning of the current section to the global offset table.
5399 (\i\c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_} is the standard symbol name used to
5400 refer to the \i{GOT}.) So you would then need to add \i\c{$$} to the
5401 result to get the real address of the GOT.
5403 \b Referring to a location in one of your own sections using \c{wrt
5404 ..gotoff} will give the distance from the beginning of the GOT to
5405 the specified location, so that adding on the address of the GOT
5406 would give the real address of the location you wanted.
5408 \b Referring to an external or global symbol using \c{wrt ..got}
5409 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5410 address of the symbol, and the reference gives the distance from the
5411 beginning of the GOT to the entry; so you can add on the address of
5412 the GOT, load from the resulting address, and end up with the
5413 address of the symbol.
5415 \b Referring to a procedure name using \c{wrt ..plt} causes the
5416 linker to build a \i{procedure linkage table} entry for the symbol,
5417 and the reference gives the address of the \i{PLT} entry. You can
5418 only use this in contexts which would generate a PC-relative
5419 relocation normally (i.e. as the destination for \c{CALL} or
5420 \c{JMP}), since ELF contains no relocation type to refer to PLT
5423 \b Referring to a symbol name using \c{wrt ..sym} causes NASM to
5424 write an ordinary relocation, but instead of making the relocation
5425 relative to the start of the section and then adding on the offset
5426 to the symbol, it will write a relocation record aimed directly at
5427 the symbol in question. The distinction is a necessary one due to a
5428 peculiarity of the dynamic linker.
5430 A fuller explanation of how to use these relocation types to write
5431 shared libraries entirely in NASM is given in \k{picdll}.
5433 \S{elftls} \i{Thread Local Storage}\I{TLS}: \c{elf} Special
5434 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5436 \b In ELF32 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5437 \c{wrt ..tlsie} \I\c{..tlsie}
5438 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5439 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5440 of the symbol with code such as:
5442 \c mov eax,[tid wrt ..tlsie]
5446 \b In ELF64 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5447 \c{wrt ..gottpoff} \I\c{..gottpoff}
5448 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5449 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5450 of the symbol with code such as:
5452 \c mov rax,[rel tid wrt ..gottpoff]
5456 \S{elfglob} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
5457 elf extensions to}\I{GLOBAL, aoutb extensions to}
5459 \c{ELF} object files can contain more information about a global symbol
5460 than just its address: they can contain the \I{symbol sizes,
5461 specifying}\I{size, of symbols}size of the symbol and its \I{symbol
5462 types, specifying}\I{type, of symbols}type as well. These are not
5463 merely debugger conveniences, but are actually necessary when the
5464 program being written is a \i{shared library}. NASM therefore
5465 supports some extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} directive, allowing you
5466 to specify these features.
5468 You can specify whether a global variable is a function or a data
5469 object by suffixing the name with a colon and the word
5470 \i\c{function} or \i\c{data}. (\i\c{object} is a synonym for
5471 \c{data}.) For example:
5473 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
5475 exports the global symbol \c{hashlookup} as a function and
5476 \c{hashtable} as a data object.
5478 Optionally, you can control the ELF visibility of the symbol. Just
5479 add one of the visibility keywords: \i\c{default}, \i\c{internal},
5480 \i\c{hidden}, or \i\c{protected}. The default is \i\c{default} of
5481 course. For example, to make \c{hashlookup} hidden:
5483 \c global hashlookup:function hidden
5485 You can also specify the size of the data associated with the
5486 symbol, as a numeric expression (which may involve labels, and even
5487 forward references) after the type specifier. Like this:
5489 \c global hashtable:data (hashtable.end - hashtable)
5492 \c db this,that,theother ; some data here
5495 This makes NASM automatically calculate the length of the table and
5496 place that information into the \c{ELF} symbol table.
5498 Declaring the type and size of global symbols is necessary when
5499 writing shared library code. For more information, see
5503 \S{elfcomm} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{COMMON} Directive
5504 \I{COMMON, elf extensions to}
5506 \c{ELF} also allows you to specify alignment requirements \I{common
5507 variables, alignment in elf}\I{alignment, of elf common variables}on
5508 common variables. This is done by putting a number (which must be a
5509 power of two) after the name and size of the common variable,
5510 separated (as usual) by a colon. For example, an array of
5511 doublewords would benefit from 4-byte alignment:
5513 \c common dwordarray 128:4
5515 This declares the total size of the array to be 128 bytes, and
5516 requires that it be aligned on a 4-byte boundary.
5519 \S{elf16} 16-bit code and ELF
5520 \I{ELF, 16-bit code and}
5522 The \c{ELF32} specification doesn't provide relocations for 8- and
5523 16-bit values, but the GNU \c{ld} linker adds these as an extension.
5524 NASM can generate GNU-compatible relocations, to allow 16-bit code to
5525 be linked as ELF using GNU \c{ld}. If NASM is used with the
5526 \c{-w+gnu-elf-extensions} option, a warning is issued when one of
5527 these relocations is generated.
5529 \S{elfdbg} Debug formats and ELF
5530 \I{ELF, Debug formats and}
5532 \c{ELF32} and \c{ELF64} provide debug information in \c{STABS} and \c{DWARF} formats.
5533 Line number information is generated for all executable sections, but please
5534 note that only the ".text" section is executable by default.
5536 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aout}: Linux \I{a.out, Linux version}\I{linux, a.out}\c{a.out} Object Files
5538 The \c{aout} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form used
5539 by early Linux systems (current Linux systems use ELF, see
5540 \k{elffmt}.) These differ from other \c{a.out} object files in that
5541 the magic number in the first four bytes of the file is
5542 different; also, some implementations of \c{a.out}, for example
5543 NetBSD's, support position-independent code, which Linux's
5544 implementation does not.
5546 \c{a.out} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5548 \c{a.out} is a very simple object format. It supports no special
5549 directives, no special symbols, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT}, and no
5550 extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5551 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5554 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aoutb}: \i{NetBSD}/\i{FreeBSD}/\i{OpenBSD}
5555 \I{a.out, BSD version}\c{a.out} Object Files
5557 The \c{aoutb} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form
5558 used by the various free \c{BSD Unix} clones, \c{NetBSD}, \c{FreeBSD}
5559 and \c{OpenBSD}. For simple object files, this object format is exactly
5560 the same as \c{aout} except for the magic number in the first four bytes
5561 of the file. However, the \c{aoutb} format supports
5562 \I{PIC}\i{position-independent code} in the same way as the \c{elf}
5563 format, so you can use it to write \c{BSD} \i{shared libraries}.
5565 \c{aoutb} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5567 \c{aoutb} supports no special directives, no special symbols, and
5568 only the three \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data}
5569 and \i\c{.bss}. However, it also supports the same use of \i\c{WRT} as
5570 \c{elf} does, to provide position-independent code relocation types.
5571 See \k{elfwrt} for full documentation of this feature.
5573 \c{aoutb} also supports the same extensions to the \c{GLOBAL}
5574 directive as \c{elf} does: see \k{elfglob} for documentation of
5578 \H{as86fmt} \c{as86}: \i{Minix}/Linux\I{linux, as86} \i\c{as86} Object Files
5580 The Minix/Linux 16-bit assembler \c{as86} has its own non-standard
5581 object file format. Although its companion linker \i\c{ld86} produces
5582 something close to ordinary \c{a.out} binaries as output, the object
5583 file format used to communicate between \c{as86} and \c{ld86} is not
5586 NASM supports this format, just in case it is useful, as \c{as86}.
5587 \c{as86} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5589 \c{as86} is a very simple object format (from the NASM user's point
5590 of view). It supports no special directives, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT},
5591 and no extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5592 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}. The
5593 only special symbol supported is \c{..start}.
5596 \H{rdffmt} \I{RDOFF}\i\c{rdf}: \i{Relocatable Dynamic Object File
5599 The \c{rdf} output format produces \c{RDOFF} object files. \c{RDOFF}
5600 (Relocatable Dynamic Object File Format) is a home-grown object-file
5601 format, designed alongside NASM itself and reflecting in its file
5602 format the internal structure of the assembler.
5604 \c{RDOFF} is not used by any well-known operating systems. Those
5605 writing their own systems, however, may well wish to use \c{RDOFF}
5606 as their object format, on the grounds that it is designed primarily
5607 for simplicity and contains very little file-header bureaucracy.
5609 The Unix NASM archive, and the DOS archive which includes sources,
5610 both contain an \I{rdoff subdirectory}\c{rdoff} subdirectory holding
5611 a set of RDOFF utilities: an RDF linker, an \c{RDF} static-library
5612 manager, an RDF file dump utility, and a program which will load and
5613 execute an RDF executable under Linux.
5615 \c{rdf} supports only the \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text},
5616 \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5619 \S{rdflib} Requiring a Library: The \i\c{LIBRARY} Directive
5621 \c{RDOFF} contains a mechanism for an object file to demand a given
5622 library to be linked to the module, either at load time or run time.
5623 This is done by the \c{LIBRARY} directive, which takes one argument
5624 which is the name of the module:
5626 \c library mylib.rdl
5629 \S{rdfmod} Specifying a Module Name: The \i\c{MODULE} Directive
5631 Special \c{RDOFF} header record is used to store the name of the module.
5632 It can be used, for example, by run-time loader to perform dynamic
5633 linking. \c{MODULE} directive takes one argument which is the name
5638 Note that when you statically link modules and tell linker to strip
5639 the symbols from output file, all module names will be stripped too.
5640 To avoid it, you should start module names with \I{$, prefix}\c{$}, like:
5642 \c module $kernel.core
5645 \S{rdfglob} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} directive\I{GLOBAL,
5648 \c{RDOFF} global symbols can contain additional information needed by
5649 the static linker. You can mark a global symbol as exported, thus
5650 telling the linker do not strip it from target executable or library
5651 file. Like in \c{ELF}, you can also specify whether an exported symbol
5652 is a procedure (function) or data object.
5654 Suffixing the name with a colon and the word \i\c{export} you make the
5657 \c global sys_open:export
5659 To specify that exported symbol is a procedure (function), you add the
5660 word \i\c{proc} or \i\c{function} after declaration:
5662 \c global sys_open:export proc
5664 Similarly, to specify exported data object, add the word \i\c{data}
5665 or \i\c{object} to the directive:
5667 \c global kernel_ticks:export data
5670 \S{rdfimpt} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN} directive\I{EXTERN,
5673 By default the \c{EXTERN} directive in \c{RDOFF} declares a "pure external"
5674 symbol (i.e. the static linker will complain if such a symbol is not resolved).
5675 To declare an "imported" symbol, which must be resolved later during a dynamic
5676 linking phase, \c{RDOFF} offers an additional \c{import} modifier. As in
5677 \c{GLOBAL}, you can also specify whether an imported symbol is a procedure
5678 (function) or data object. For example:
5681 \c extern _open:import
5682 \c extern _printf:import proc
5683 \c extern _errno:import data
5685 Here the directive \c{LIBRARY} is also included, which gives the dynamic linker
5686 a hint as to where to find requested symbols.
5689 \H{dbgfmt} \i\c{dbg}: Debugging Format
5691 The \c{dbg} output format is not built into NASM in the default
5692 configuration. If you are building your own NASM executable from the
5693 sources, you can define \i\c{OF_DBG} in \c{outform.h} or on the
5694 compiler command line, and obtain the \c{dbg} output format.
5696 The \c{dbg} format does not output an object file as such; instead,
5697 it outputs a text file which contains a complete list of all the
5698 transactions between the main body of NASM and the output-format
5699 back end module. It is primarily intended to aid people who want to
5700 write their own output drivers, so that they can get a clearer idea
5701 of the various requests the main program makes of the output driver,
5702 and in what order they happen.
5704 For simple files, one can easily use the \c{dbg} format like this:
5706 \c nasm -f dbg filename.asm
5708 which will generate a diagnostic file called \c{filename.dbg}.
5709 However, this will not work well on files which were designed for a
5710 different object format, because each object format defines its own
5711 macros (usually user-level forms of directives), and those macros
5712 will not be defined in the \c{dbg} format. Therefore it can be
5713 useful to run NASM twice, in order to do the preprocessing with the
5714 native object format selected:
5716 \c nasm -e -f rdf -o rdfprog.i rdfprog.asm
5717 \c nasm -a -f dbg rdfprog.i
5719 This preprocesses \c{rdfprog.asm} into \c{rdfprog.i}, keeping the
5720 \c{rdf} object format selected in order to make sure RDF special
5721 directives are converted into primitive form correctly. Then the
5722 preprocessed source is fed through the \c{dbg} format to generate
5723 the final diagnostic output.
5725 This workaround will still typically not work for programs intended
5726 for \c{obj} format, because the \c{obj} \c{SEGMENT} and \c{GROUP}
5727 directives have side effects of defining the segment and group names
5728 as symbols; \c{dbg} will not do this, so the program will not
5729 assemble. You will have to work around that by defining the symbols
5730 yourself (using \c{EXTERN}, for example) if you really need to get a
5731 \c{dbg} trace of an \c{obj}-specific source file.
5733 \c{dbg} accepts any section name and any directives at all, and logs
5734 them all to its output file.
5737 \C{16bit} Writing 16-bit Code (DOS, Windows 3/3.1)
5739 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues encountered
5740 when writing 16-bit code to run under \c{MS-DOS} or \c{Windows 3.x}. It
5741 covers how to link programs to produce \c{.EXE} or \c{.COM} files,
5742 how to write \c{.SYS} device drivers, and how to interface assembly
5743 language code with 16-bit C compilers and with Borland Pascal.
5746 \H{exefiles} Producing \i\c{.EXE} Files
5748 Any large program written under DOS needs to be built as a \c{.EXE}
5749 file: only \c{.EXE} files have the necessary internal structure
5750 required to span more than one 64K segment. \i{Windows} programs,
5751 also, have to be built as \c{.EXE} files, since Windows does not
5752 support the \c{.COM} format.
5754 In general, you generate \c{.EXE} files by using the \c{obj} output
5755 format to produce one or more \i\c{.OBJ} files, and then linking
5756 them together using a linker. However, NASM also supports the direct
5757 generation of simple DOS \c{.EXE} files using the \c{bin} output
5758 format (by using \c{DB} and \c{DW} to construct the \c{.EXE} file
5759 header), and a macro package is supplied to do this. Thanks to
5760 Yann Guidon for contributing the code for this.
5762 NASM may also support \c{.EXE} natively as another output format in
5766 \S{objexe} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
5768 This section describes the usual method of generating \c{.EXE} files
5769 by linking \c{.OBJ} files together.
5771 Most 16-bit programming language packages come with a suitable
5772 linker; if you have none of these, there is a free linker called
5773 \i{VAL}\I{linker, free}, available in \c{LZH} archive format from
5774 \W{ftp://x2ftp.oulu.fi/pub/msdos/programming/lang/}\i\c{x2ftp.oulu.fi}.
5775 An LZH archiver can be found at
5776 \W{ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/arcers}\i\c{ftp.simtel.net}.
5777 There is another `free' linker (though this one doesn't come with
5778 sources) called \i{FREELINK}, available from
5779 \W{http://www.pcorner.com/tpc/old/3-101.html}\i\c{www.pcorner.com}.
5780 A third, \i\c{djlink}, written by DJ Delorie, is available at
5781 \W{http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/16bit/djlink/}\i\c{www.delorie.com}.
5782 A fourth linker, \i\c{ALINK}, written by Anthony A.J. Williams, is
5783 available at \W{http://alink.sourceforge.net}\i\c{alink.sourceforge.net}.
5785 When linking several \c{.OBJ} files into a \c{.EXE} file, you should
5786 ensure that exactly one of them has a start point defined (using the
5787 \I{program entry point}\i\c{..start} special symbol defined by the
5788 \c{obj} format: see \k{dotdotstart}). If no module defines a start
5789 point, the linker will not know what value to give the entry-point
5790 field in the output file header; if more than one defines a start
5791 point, the linker will not know \e{which} value to use.
5793 An example of a NASM source file which can be assembled to a
5794 \c{.OBJ} file and linked on its own to a \c{.EXE} is given here. It
5795 demonstrates the basic principles of defining a stack, initialising
5796 the segment registers, and declaring a start point. This file is
5797 also provided in the \I{test subdirectory}\c{test} subdirectory of
5798 the NASM archives, under the name \c{objexe.asm}.
5809 This initial piece of code sets up \c{DS} to point to the data
5810 segment, and initializes \c{SS} and \c{SP} to point to the top of
5811 the provided stack. Notice that interrupts are implicitly disabled
5812 for one instruction after a move into \c{SS}, precisely for this
5813 situation, so that there's no chance of an interrupt occurring
5814 between the loads of \c{SS} and \c{SP} and not having a stack to
5817 Note also that the special symbol \c{..start} is defined at the
5818 beginning of this code, which means that will be the entry point
5819 into the resulting executable file.
5825 The above is the main program: load \c{DS:DX} with a pointer to the
5826 greeting message (\c{hello} is implicitly relative to the segment
5827 \c{data}, which was loaded into \c{DS} in the setup code, so the
5828 full pointer is valid), and call the DOS print-string function.
5833 This terminates the program using another DOS system call.
5837 \c hello: db 'hello, world', 13, 10, '$'
5839 The data segment contains the string we want to display.
5841 \c segment stack stack
5845 The above code declares a stack segment containing 64 bytes of
5846 uninitialized stack space, and points \c{stacktop} at the top of it.
5847 The directive \c{segment stack stack} defines a segment \e{called}
5848 \c{stack}, and also of \e{type} \c{STACK}. The latter is not
5849 necessary to the correct running of the program, but linkers are
5850 likely to issue warnings or errors if your program has no segment of
5853 The above file, when assembled into a \c{.OBJ} file, will link on
5854 its own to a valid \c{.EXE} file, which when run will print `hello,
5855 world' and then exit.
5858 \S{binexe} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
5860 The \c{.EXE} file format is simple enough that it's possible to
5861 build a \c{.EXE} file by writing a pure-binary program and sticking
5862 a 32-byte header on the front. This header is simple enough that it
5863 can be generated using \c{DB} and \c{DW} commands by NASM itself, so
5864 that you can use the \c{bin} output format to directly generate
5867 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
5868 subdirectory, is a file \i\c{exebin.mac} of macros. It defines three
5869 macros: \i\c{EXE_begin}, \i\c{EXE_stack} and \i\c{EXE_end}.
5871 To produce a \c{.EXE} file using this method, you should start by
5872 using \c{%include} to load the \c{exebin.mac} macro package into
5873 your source file. You should then issue the \c{EXE_begin} macro call
5874 (which takes no arguments) to generate the file header data. Then
5875 write code as normal for the \c{bin} format - you can use all three
5876 standard sections \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}. At the end of
5877 the file you should call the \c{EXE_end} macro (again, no arguments),
5878 which defines some symbols to mark section sizes, and these symbols
5879 are referred to in the header code generated by \c{EXE_begin}.
5881 In this model, the code you end up writing starts at \c{0x100}, just
5882 like a \c{.COM} file - in fact, if you strip off the 32-byte header
5883 from the resulting \c{.EXE} file, you will have a valid \c{.COM}
5884 program. All the segment bases are the same, so you are limited to a
5885 64K program, again just like a \c{.COM} file. Note that an \c{ORG}
5886 directive is issued by the \c{EXE_begin} macro, so you should not
5887 explicitly issue one of your own.
5889 You can't directly refer to your segment base value, unfortunately,
5890 since this would require a relocation in the header, and things
5891 would get a lot more complicated. So you should get your segment
5892 base by copying it out of \c{CS} instead.
5894 On entry to your \c{.EXE} file, \c{SS:SP} are already set up to
5895 point to the top of a 2Kb stack. You can adjust the default stack
5896 size of 2Kb by calling the \c{EXE_stack} macro. For example, to
5897 change the stack size of your program to 64 bytes, you would call
5900 A sample program which generates a \c{.EXE} file in this way is
5901 given in the \c{test} subdirectory of the NASM archive, as
5905 \H{comfiles} Producing \i\c{.COM} Files
5907 While large DOS programs must be written as \c{.EXE} files, small
5908 ones are often better written as \c{.COM} files. \c{.COM} files are
5909 pure binary, and therefore most easily produced using the \c{bin}
5913 \S{combinfmt} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
5915 \c{.COM} files expect to be loaded at offset \c{100h} into their
5916 segment (though the segment may change). Execution then begins at
5917 \I\c{ORG}\c{100h}, i.e. right at the start of the program. So to
5918 write a \c{.COM} program, you would create a source file looking
5926 \c ; put your code here
5930 \c ; put data items here
5934 \c ; put uninitialized data here
5936 The \c{bin} format puts the \c{.text} section first in the file, so
5937 you can declare data or BSS items before beginning to write code if
5938 you want to and the code will still end up at the front of the file
5941 The BSS (uninitialized data) section does not take up space in the
5942 \c{.COM} file itself: instead, addresses of BSS items are resolved
5943 to point at space beyond the end of the file, on the grounds that
5944 this will be free memory when the program is run. Therefore you
5945 should not rely on your BSS being initialized to all zeros when you
5948 To assemble the above program, you should use a command line like
5950 \c nasm myprog.asm -fbin -o myprog.com
5952 The \c{bin} format would produce a file called \c{myprog} if no
5953 explicit output file name were specified, so you have to override it
5954 and give the desired file name.
5957 \S{comobjfmt} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
5959 If you are writing a \c{.COM} program as more than one module, you
5960 may wish to assemble several \c{.OBJ} files and link them together
5961 into a \c{.COM} program. You can do this, provided you have a linker
5962 capable of outputting \c{.COM} files directly (\i{TLINK} does this),
5963 or alternatively a converter program such as \i\c{EXE2BIN} to
5964 transform the \c{.EXE} file output from the linker into a \c{.COM}
5967 If you do this, you need to take care of several things:
5969 \b The first object file containing code should start its code
5970 segment with a line like \c{RESB 100h}. This is to ensure that the
5971 code begins at offset \c{100h} relative to the beginning of the code
5972 segment, so that the linker or converter program does not have to
5973 adjust address references within the file when generating the
5974 \c{.COM} file. Other assemblers use an \i\c{ORG} directive for this
5975 purpose, but \c{ORG} in NASM is a format-specific directive to the
5976 \c{bin} output format, and does not mean the same thing as it does
5977 in MASM-compatible assemblers.
5979 \b You don't need to define a stack segment.
5981 \b All your segments should be in the same group, so that every time
5982 your code or data references a symbol offset, all offsets are
5983 relative to the same segment base. This is because, when a \c{.COM}
5984 file is loaded, all the segment registers contain the same value.
5987 \H{sysfiles} Producing \i\c{.SYS} Files
5989 \i{MS-DOS device drivers} - \c{.SYS} files - are pure binary files,
5990 similar to \c{.COM} files, except that they start at origin zero
5991 rather than \c{100h}. Therefore, if you are writing a device driver
5992 using the \c{bin} format, you do not need the \c{ORG} directive,
5993 since the default origin for \c{bin} is zero. Similarly, if you are
5994 using \c{obj}, you do not need the \c{RESB 100h} at the start of
5997 \c{.SYS} files start with a header structure, containing pointers to
5998 the various routines inside the driver which do the work. This
5999 structure should be defined at the start of the code segment, even
6000 though it is not actually code.
6002 For more information on the format of \c{.SYS} files, and the data
6003 which has to go in the header structure, a list of books is given in
6004 the Frequently Asked Questions list for the newsgroup
6005 \W{news:comp.os.msdos.programmer}\i\c{comp.os.msdos.programmer}.
6008 \H{16c} Interfacing to 16-bit C Programs
6010 This section covers the basics of writing assembly routines that
6011 call, or are called from, C programs. To do this, you would
6012 typically write an assembly module as a \c{.OBJ} file, and link it
6013 with your C modules to produce a \i{mixed-language program}.
6016 \S{16cunder} External Symbol Names
6018 \I{C symbol names}\I{underscore, in C symbols}C compilers have the
6019 convention that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6020 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6021 appears in the C program. So, for example, the function a C
6022 programmer thinks of as \c{printf} appears to an assembly language
6023 programmer as \c{_printf}. This means that in your assembly
6024 programs, you can define symbols without a leading underscore, and
6025 not have to worry about name clashes with C symbols.
6027 If you find the underscores inconvenient, you can define macros to
6028 replace the \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN} directives as follows:
6044 (These forms of the macros only take one argument at a time; a
6045 \c{%rep} construct could solve this.)
6047 If you then declare an external like this:
6051 then the macro will expand it as
6054 \c %define printf _printf
6056 Thereafter, you can reference \c{printf} as if it was a symbol, and
6057 the preprocessor will put the leading underscore on where necessary.
6059 The \c{cglobal} macro works similarly. You must use \c{cglobal}
6060 before defining the symbol in question, but you would have had to do
6061 that anyway if you used \c{GLOBAL}.
6063 Also see \k{opt-pfix}.
6065 \S{16cmodels} \i{Memory Models}
6067 NASM contains no mechanism to support the various C memory models
6068 directly; you have to keep track yourself of which one you are
6069 writing for. This means you have to keep track of the following
6072 \b In models using a single code segment (tiny, small and compact),
6073 functions are near. This means that function pointers, when stored
6074 in data segments or pushed on the stack as function arguments, are
6075 16 bits long and contain only an offset field (the \c{CS} register
6076 never changes its value, and always gives the segment part of the
6077 full function address), and that functions are called using ordinary
6078 near \c{CALL} instructions and return using \c{RETN} (which, in
6079 NASM, is synonymous with \c{RET} anyway). This means both that you
6080 should write your own routines to return with \c{RETN}, and that you
6081 should call external C routines with near \c{CALL} instructions.
6083 \b In models using more than one code segment (medium, large and
6084 huge), functions are far. This means that function pointers are 32
6085 bits long (consisting of a 16-bit offset followed by a 16-bit
6086 segment), and that functions are called using \c{CALL FAR} (or
6087 \c{CALL seg:offset}) and return using \c{RETF}. Again, you should
6088 therefore write your own routines to return with \c{RETF} and use
6089 \c{CALL FAR} to call external routines.
6091 \b In models using a single data segment (tiny, small and medium),
6092 data pointers are 16 bits long, containing only an offset field (the
6093 \c{DS} register doesn't change its value, and always gives the
6094 segment part of the full data item address).
6096 \b In models using more than one data segment (compact, large and
6097 huge), data pointers are 32 bits long, consisting of a 16-bit offset
6098 followed by a 16-bit segment. You should still be careful not to
6099 modify \c{DS} in your routines without restoring it afterwards, but
6100 \c{ES} is free for you to use to access the contents of 32-bit data
6101 pointers you are passed.
6103 \b The huge memory model allows single data items to exceed 64K in
6104 size. In all other memory models, you can access the whole of a data
6105 item just by doing arithmetic on the offset field of the pointer you
6106 are given, whether a segment field is present or not; in huge model,
6107 you have to be more careful of your pointer arithmetic.
6109 \b In most memory models, there is a \e{default} data segment, whose
6110 segment address is kept in \c{DS} throughout the program. This data
6111 segment is typically the same segment as the stack, kept in \c{SS},
6112 so that functions' local variables (which are stored on the stack)
6113 and global data items can both be accessed easily without changing
6114 \c{DS}. Particularly large data items are typically stored in other
6115 segments. However, some memory models (though not the standard
6116 ones, usually) allow the assumption that \c{SS} and \c{DS} hold the
6117 same value to be removed. Be careful about functions' local
6118 variables in this latter case.
6120 In models with a single code segment, the segment is called
6121 \i\c{_TEXT}, so your code segment must also go by this name in order
6122 to be linked into the same place as the main code segment. In models
6123 with a single data segment, or with a default data segment, it is
6127 \S{16cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6129 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention} in
6130 16-bit programs is as follows. In the following description, the
6131 words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote the function
6132 doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6134 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6135 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6136 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6138 \b The caller then executes a \c{CALL} instruction to pass control
6139 to the callee. This \c{CALL} is either near or far depending on the
6142 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6143 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6144 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6145 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6146 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6147 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6148 any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as
6149 a \i\e{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6151 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6152 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6153 pushed; the next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6154 return address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. In a small-model
6155 (near) function, the parameters start after that, at \c{[BP+4]}; in
6156 a large-model (far) function, the segment part of the return address
6157 lives at \c{[BP+4]}, and the parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The
6158 leftmost parameter of the function, since it was pushed last, is
6159 accessible at this offset from \c{BP}; the others follow, at
6160 successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function such as \c{printf}
6161 which takes a variable number of parameters, the pushing of the
6162 parameters in reverse order means that the function knows where to
6163 find its first parameter, which tells it the number and type of the
6166 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6167 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6168 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6170 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6171 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6172 of the value. Floating-point results are sometimes (depending on the
6173 compiler) returned in \c{ST0}.
6175 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6176 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6177 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETN} or \c{RETF} depending on
6180 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6181 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6182 constant to \c{SP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6183 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6184 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6185 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6186 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6189 It is instructive to compare this calling convention with that for
6190 Pascal programs (described in \k{16bpfunc}). Pascal has a simpler
6191 convention, since no functions have variable numbers of parameters.
6192 Therefore the callee knows how many parameters it should have been
6193 passed, and is able to deallocate them from the stack itself by
6194 passing an immediate argument to the \c{RET} or \c{RETF}
6195 instruction, so the caller does not have to do it. Also, the
6196 parameters are pushed in left-to-right order, not right-to-left,
6197 which means that a compiler can give better guarantees about
6198 sequence points without performance suffering.
6200 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way.
6201 The following example is for small model:
6208 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6209 \c mov bx,[bp+4] ; first parameter to function
6213 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6217 For a large-model function, you would replace \c{RET} by \c{RETF},
6218 and look for the first parameter at \c{[BP+6]} instead of
6219 \c{[BP+4]}. Of course, if one of the parameters is a pointer, then
6220 the offsets of \e{subsequent} parameters will change depending on
6221 the memory model as well: far pointers take up four bytes on the
6222 stack when passed as a parameter, whereas near pointers take up two.
6224 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6225 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6229 \c ; and then, further down...
6231 \c push word [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6232 \c push word mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6234 \c add sp,byte 4 ; `byte' saves space
6236 \c ; then those data items...
6241 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6243 This piece of code is the small-model assembly equivalent of the C
6246 \c int myint = 1234;
6247 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6249 In large model, the function-call code might look more like this. In
6250 this example, it is assumed that \c{DS} already holds the segment
6251 base of the segment \c{_DATA}. If not, you would have to initialize
6254 \c push word [myint]
6255 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6256 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6260 The integer value still takes up one word on the stack, since large
6261 model does not affect the size of the \c{int} data type. The first
6262 argument (pushed last) to \c{printf}, however, is a data pointer,
6263 and therefore has to contain a segment and offset part. The segment
6264 should be stored second in memory, and therefore must be pushed
6265 first. (Of course, \c{PUSH DS} would have been a shorter instruction
6266 than \c{PUSH WORD SEG mystring}, if \c{DS} was set up as the above
6267 example assumed.) Then the actual call becomes a far call, since
6268 functions expect far calls in large model; and \c{SP} has to be
6269 increased by 6 rather than 4 afterwards to make up for the extra
6273 \S{16cdata} Accessing Data Items
6275 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6276 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6277 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6278 in \k{16cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6279 accessed from assembler as
6285 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6286 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6287 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6293 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6294 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are two bytes long, so if
6295 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6296 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+6]}. (The byte offset 6 is obtained
6297 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6298 element, 2.) The sizes of the C base types in 16-bit compilers are:
6299 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short} and \c{int}, 4 for \c{long} and
6300 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}.
6302 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6303 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6304 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6305 NASM structure definition (using \i\c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6306 one offset and using just that.
6308 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6309 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6310 alignment to structure members in its own \c{STRUC} macro, so you
6311 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6312 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6319 might be four bytes long rather than three, since the \c{int} field
6320 would be aligned to a two-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6321 feature tends to be a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6322 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6323 out how your own compiler does it.
6326 \S{16cmacro} \i\c{c16.mac}: Helper Macros for the 16-bit C Interface
6328 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6329 directory, is a file \c{c16.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6330 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6331 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6332 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6334 (An alternative, TASM compatible form of \c{arg} is also now built
6335 into NASM's preprocessor. See \k{stackrel} for details.)
6337 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6344 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6345 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6350 This defines \c{_nearproc} to be a procedure taking two arguments,
6351 the first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6352 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
6354 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
6355 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
6356 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
6357 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
6358 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
6359 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
6360 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
6362 The macro set produces code for near functions (tiny, small and
6363 compact-model code) by default. You can have it generate far
6364 functions (medium, large and huge-model code) by means of coding
6365 \I\c{FARCODE}\c{%define FARCODE}. This changes the kind of return
6366 instruction generated by \c{endproc}, and also changes the starting
6367 point for the argument offsets. The macro set contains no intrinsic
6368 dependency on whether data pointers are far or not.
6370 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
6371 argument. If no size is given, 2 is assumed, since it is likely that
6372 many function parameters will be of type \c{int}.
6374 The large-model equivalent of the above function would look like this:
6382 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6383 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6384 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6389 This makes use of the argument to the \c{arg} macro to define a
6390 parameter of size 4, because \c{j} is now a far pointer. When we
6391 load from \c{j}, we must load a segment and an offset.
6394 \H{16bp} Interfacing to \i{Borland Pascal} Programs
6396 Interfacing to Borland Pascal programs is similar in concept to
6397 interfacing to 16-bit C programs. The differences are:
6399 \b The leading underscore required for interfacing to C programs is
6400 not required for Pascal.
6402 \b The memory model is always large: functions are far, data
6403 pointers are far, and no data item can be more than 64K long.
6404 (Actually, some functions are near, but only those functions that
6405 are local to a Pascal unit and never called from outside it. All
6406 assembly functions that Pascal calls, and all Pascal functions that
6407 assembly routines are able to call, are far.) However, all static
6408 data declared in a Pascal program goes into the default data
6409 segment, which is the one whose segment address will be in \c{DS}
6410 when control is passed to your assembly code. The only things that
6411 do not live in the default data segment are local variables (they
6412 live in the stack segment) and dynamically allocated variables. All
6413 data \e{pointers}, however, are far.
6415 \b The function calling convention is different - described below.
6417 \b Some data types, such as strings, are stored differently.
6419 \b There are restrictions on the segment names you are allowed to
6420 use - Borland Pascal will ignore code or data declared in a segment
6421 it doesn't like the name of. The restrictions are described below.
6424 \S{16bpfunc} The Pascal Calling Convention
6426 \I{functions, Pascal calling convention}\I{Pascal calling
6427 convention}The 16-bit Pascal calling convention is as follows. In
6428 the following description, the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are
6429 used to denote the function doing the calling and the function which
6432 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6433 after another, in normal order (left to right, so that the first
6434 argument specified to the function is pushed first).
6436 \b The caller then executes a far \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6437 control to the callee.
6439 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6440 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6441 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6442 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6443 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6444 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6445 any function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as a
6446 \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6448 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6449 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6450 pushed. The next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6451 return address, and the next one at \c{[BP+4]} the segment part. The
6452 parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The rightmost parameter of the
6453 function, since it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset
6454 from \c{BP}; the others follow, at successively greater offsets.
6456 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6457 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6458 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6460 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6461 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6462 of the value. Floating-point results are returned in \c{ST0}.
6463 Results of type \c{Real} (Borland's own custom floating-point data
6464 type, not handled directly by the FPU) are returned in \c{DX:BX:AX}.
6465 To return a result of type \c{String}, the caller pushes a pointer
6466 to a temporary string before pushing the parameters, and the callee
6467 places the returned string value at that location. The pointer is
6468 not a parameter, and should not be removed from the stack by the
6469 \c{RETF} instruction.
6471 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6472 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6473 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETF}. It uses the form of
6474 \c{RETF} with an immediate parameter, giving the number of bytes
6475 taken up by the parameters on the stack. This causes the parameters
6476 to be removed from the stack as a side effect of the return
6479 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6480 parameters have already been removed from the stack, so it needs to
6483 Thus, you would define a function in Pascal style, taking two
6484 \c{Integer}-type parameters, in the following way:
6490 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6491 \c mov bx,[bp+8] ; first parameter to function
6492 \c mov bx,[bp+6] ; second parameter to function
6496 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6498 \c retf 4 ; total size of params is 4
6500 At the other end of the process, to call a Pascal function from your
6501 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6505 \c ; and then, further down...
6507 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6508 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6509 \c push word [myint] ; one of my variables
6510 \c call far SomeFunc
6512 This is equivalent to the Pascal code
6514 \c procedure SomeFunc(String: PChar; Int: Integer);
6515 \c SomeFunc(@mystring, myint);
6518 \S{16bpseg} Borland Pascal \I{segment names, Borland Pascal}Segment
6521 Since Borland Pascal's internal unit file format is completely
6522 different from \c{OBJ}, it only makes a very sketchy job of actually
6523 reading and understanding the various information contained in a
6524 real \c{OBJ} file when it links that in. Therefore an object file
6525 intended to be linked to a Pascal program must obey a number of
6528 \b Procedures and functions must be in a segment whose name is
6529 either \c{CODE}, \c{CSEG}, or something ending in \c{_TEXT}.
6531 \b initialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6532 \c{CONST} or something ending in \c{_DATA}.
6534 \b Uninitialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6535 \c{DATA}, \c{DSEG}, or something ending in \c{_BSS}.
6537 \b Any other segments in the object file are completely ignored.
6538 \c{GROUP} directives and segment attributes are also ignored.
6541 \S{16bpmacro} Using \i\c{c16.mac} With Pascal Programs
6543 The \c{c16.mac} macro package, described in \k{16cmacro}, can also
6544 be used to simplify writing functions to be called from Pascal
6545 programs, if you code \I\c{PASCAL}\c{%define PASCAL}. This
6546 definition ensures that functions are far (it implies
6547 \i\c{FARCODE}), and also causes procedure return instructions to be
6548 generated with an operand.
6550 Defining \c{PASCAL} does not change the code which calculates the
6551 argument offsets; you must declare your function's arguments in
6552 reverse order. For example:
6560 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6561 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6562 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6567 This defines the same routine, conceptually, as the example in
6568 \k{16cmacro}: it defines a function taking two arguments, an integer
6569 and a pointer to an integer, which returns the sum of the integer
6570 and the contents of the pointer. The only difference between this
6571 code and the large-model C version is that \c{PASCAL} is defined
6572 instead of \c{FARCODE}, and that the arguments are declared in
6576 \C{32bit} Writing 32-bit Code (Unix, Win32, DJGPP)
6578 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved
6579 when writing 32-bit code, to run under \i{Win32} or Unix, or to be
6580 linked with C code generated by a Unix-style C compiler such as
6581 \i{DJGPP}. It covers how to write assembly code to interface with
6582 32-bit C routines, and how to write position-independent code for
6585 Almost all 32-bit code, and in particular all code running under
6586 \c{Win32}, \c{DJGPP} or any of the PC Unix variants, runs in \I{flat
6587 memory model}\e{flat} memory model. This means that the segment registers
6588 and paging have already been set up to give you the same 32-bit 4Gb
6589 address space no matter what segment you work relative to, and that
6590 you should ignore all segment registers completely. When writing
6591 flat-model application code, you never need to use a segment
6592 override or modify any segment register, and the code-section
6593 addresses you pass to \c{CALL} and \c{JMP} live in the same address
6594 space as the data-section addresses you access your variables by and
6595 the stack-section addresses you access local variables and procedure
6596 parameters by. Every address is 32 bits long and contains only an
6600 \H{32c} Interfacing to 32-bit C Programs
6602 A lot of the discussion in \k{16c}, about interfacing to 16-bit C
6603 programs, still applies when working in 32 bits. The absence of
6604 memory models or segmentation worries simplifies things a lot.
6607 \S{32cunder} External Symbol Names
6609 Most 32-bit C compilers share the convention used by 16-bit
6610 compilers, that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6611 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6612 appears in the C program. However, not all of them do: the \c{ELF}
6613 specification states that C symbols do \e{not} have a leading
6614 underscore on their assembly-language names.
6616 The older Linux \c{a.out} C compiler, all \c{Win32} compilers,
6617 \c{DJGPP}, and \c{NetBSD} and \c{FreeBSD}, all use the leading
6618 underscore; for these compilers, the macros \c{cextern} and
6619 \c{cglobal}, as given in \k{16cunder}, will still work. For \c{ELF},
6620 though, the leading underscore should not be used.
6622 See also \k{opt-pfix}.
6624 \S{32cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6626 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention}
6627 in 32-bit programs is as follows. In the following description,
6628 the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote
6629 the function doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6631 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6632 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6633 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6635 \b The caller then executes a near \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6636 control to the callee.
6638 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6639 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6640 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{ESP} in \c{EBP} so as
6641 to be able to use \c{EBP} as a base pointer to find its parameters
6642 on the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so
6643 part of the calling convention states that \c{EBP} must be preserved
6644 by any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up
6645 \c{EBP} as a \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6647 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{EBP}.
6648 The doubleword at \c{[EBP]} holds the previous value of \c{EBP} as
6649 it was pushed; the next doubleword, at \c{[EBP+4]}, holds the return
6650 address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. The parameters start after
6651 that, at \c{[EBP+8]}. The leftmost parameter of the function, since
6652 it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset from \c{EBP}; the
6653 others follow, at successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function
6654 such as \c{printf} which takes a variable number of parameters, the
6655 pushing of the parameters in reverse order means that the function
6656 knows where to find its first parameter, which tells it the number
6657 and type of the remaining ones.
6659 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{ESP} further, so as to
6660 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6661 accessible at negative offsets from \c{EBP}.
6663 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6664 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{EAX} depending on the size
6665 of the value. Floating-point results are typically returned in
6668 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{ESP} from
6669 \c{EBP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6670 value of \c{EBP}, and returns via \c{RET} (equivalently, \c{RETN}).
6672 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6673 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6674 constant to \c{ESP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6675 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6676 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6677 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6678 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6681 There is an alternative calling convention used by Win32 programs
6682 for Windows API calls, and also for functions called \e{by} the
6683 Windows API such as window procedures: they follow what Microsoft
6684 calls the \c{__stdcall} convention. This is slightly closer to the
6685 Pascal convention, in that the callee clears the stack by passing a
6686 parameter to the \c{RET} instruction. However, the parameters are
6687 still pushed in right-to-left order.
6689 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way:
6696 \c sub esp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6697 \c mov ebx,[ebp+8] ; first parameter to function
6701 \c leave ; mov esp,ebp / pop ebp
6704 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6705 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6709 \c ; and then, further down...
6711 \c push dword [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6712 \c push dword mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6714 \c add esp,byte 8 ; `byte' saves space
6716 \c ; then those data items...
6721 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6723 This piece of code is the assembly equivalent of the C code
6725 \c int myint = 1234;
6726 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6729 \S{32cdata} Accessing Data Items
6731 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6732 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6733 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6734 in \k{32cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6735 accessed from assembler as
6740 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6741 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6742 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6747 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6748 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are four bytes long, so if
6749 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6750 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+12]}. (The byte offset 12 is obtained
6751 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6752 element, 4.) The sizes of the C base types in 32-bit compilers are:
6753 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short}, 4 for \c{int}, \c{long} and
6754 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}. Pointers, being 32-bit addresses,
6755 are also 4 bytes long.
6757 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6758 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6759 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6760 NASM structure definition (using \c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6761 one offset and using just that.
6763 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6764 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6765 alignment to structure members in its own \i\c{STRUC} macro, so you
6766 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6767 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6774 might be eight bytes long rather than five, since the \c{int} field
6775 would be aligned to a four-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6776 feature is sometimes a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6777 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6778 out how your own compiler does it.
6781 \S{32cmacro} \i\c{c32.mac}: Helper Macros for the 32-bit C Interface
6783 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc directory}\c{misc}
6784 directory, is a file \c{c32.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6785 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6786 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6787 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6789 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6796 \c mov eax,[ebp + %$i]
6797 \c mov ebx,[ebp + %$j]
6802 This defines \c{_proc32} to be a procedure taking two arguments, the
6803 first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6804 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
6806 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
6807 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
6808 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
6809 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
6810 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
6811 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
6812 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
6814 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
6815 argument. If no size is given, 4 is assumed, since it is likely that
6816 many function parameters will be of type \c{int} or pointers.
6819 \H{picdll} Writing NetBSD/FreeBSD/OpenBSD and Linux/ELF \i{Shared
6822 \c{ELF} replaced the older \c{a.out} object file format under Linux
6823 because it contains support for \i{position-independent code}
6824 (\i{PIC}), which makes writing shared libraries much easier. NASM
6825 supports the \c{ELF} position-independent code features, so you can
6826 write Linux \c{ELF} shared libraries in NASM.
6828 \i{NetBSD}, and its close cousins \i{FreeBSD} and \i{OpenBSD}, take
6829 a different approach by hacking PIC support into the \c{a.out}
6830 format. NASM supports this as the \i\c{aoutb} output format, so you
6831 can write \i{BSD} shared libraries in NASM too.
6833 The operating system loads a PIC shared library by memory-mapping
6834 the library file at an arbitrarily chosen point in the address space
6835 of the running process. The contents of the library's code section
6836 must therefore not depend on where it is loaded in memory.
6838 Therefore, you cannot get at your variables by writing code like
6841 \c mov eax,[myvar] ; WRONG
6843 Instead, the linker provides an area of memory called the
6844 \i\e{global offset table}, or \i{GOT}; the GOT is situated at a
6845 constant distance from your library's code, so if you can find out
6846 where your library is loaded (which is typically done using a
6847 \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination), you can obtain the address of the
6848 GOT, and you can then load the addresses of your variables out of
6849 linker-generated entries in the GOT.
6851 The \e{data} section of a PIC shared library does not have these
6852 restrictions: since the data section is writable, it has to be
6853 copied into memory anyway rather than just paged in from the library
6854 file, so as long as it's being copied it can be relocated too. So
6855 you can put ordinary types of relocation in the data section without
6856 too much worry (but see \k{picglobal} for a caveat).
6859 \S{picgot} Obtaining the Address of the GOT
6861 Each code module in your shared library should define the GOT as an
6864 \c extern _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in ELF
6865 \c extern __GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in BSD a.out
6867 At the beginning of any function in your shared library which plans
6868 to access your data or BSS sections, you must first calculate the
6869 address of the GOT. This is typically done by writing the function
6878 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-.get_GOT wrt ..gotpc
6880 \c ; the function body comes here
6887 (For BSD, again, the symbol \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE} requires a
6888 second leading underscore.)
6890 The first two lines of this function are simply the standard C
6891 prologue to set up a stack frame, and the last three lines are
6892 standard C function epilogue. The third line, and the fourth to last
6893 line, save and restore the \c{EBX} register, because PIC shared
6894 libraries use this register to store the address of the GOT.
6896 The interesting bit is the \c{CALL} instruction and the following
6897 two lines. The \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination obtains the address
6898 of the label \c{.get_GOT}, without having to know in advance where
6899 the program was loaded (since the \c{CALL} instruction is encoded
6900 relative to the current position). The \c{ADD} instruction makes use
6901 of one of the special PIC relocation types: \i{GOTPC relocation}.
6902 With the \i\c{WRT ..gotpc} qualifier specified, the symbol
6903 referenced (here \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_}, the special symbol
6904 assigned to the GOT) is given as an offset from the beginning of the
6905 section. (Actually, \c{ELF} encodes it as the offset from the operand
6906 field of the \c{ADD} instruction, but NASM simplifies this
6907 deliberately, so you do things the same way for both \c{ELF} and
6908 \c{BSD}.) So the instruction then \e{adds} the beginning of the section,
6909 to get the real address of the GOT, and subtracts the value of
6910 \c{.get_GOT} which it knows is in \c{EBX}. Therefore, by the time
6911 that instruction has finished, \c{EBX} contains the address of the GOT.
6913 If you didn't follow that, don't worry: it's never necessary to
6914 obtain the address of the GOT by any other means, so you can put
6915 those three instructions into a macro and safely ignore them:
6922 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-%%getgot wrt ..gotpc
6926 \S{piclocal} Finding Your Local Data Items
6928 Having got the GOT, you can then use it to obtain the addresses of
6929 your data items. Most variables will reside in the sections you have
6930 declared; they can be accessed using the \I{GOTOFF
6931 relocation}\c{..gotoff} special \I\c{WRT ..gotoff}\c{WRT} type. The
6932 way this works is like this:
6934 \c lea eax,[ebx+myvar wrt ..gotoff]
6936 The expression \c{myvar wrt ..gotoff} is calculated, when the shared
6937 library is linked, to be the offset to the local variable \c{myvar}
6938 from the beginning of the GOT. Therefore, adding it to \c{EBX} as
6939 above will place the real address of \c{myvar} in \c{EAX}.
6941 If you declare variables as \c{GLOBAL} without specifying a size for
6942 them, they are shared between code modules in the library, but do
6943 not get exported from the library to the program that loaded it.
6944 They will still be in your ordinary data and BSS sections, so you
6945 can access them in the same way as local variables, using the above
6946 \c{..gotoff} mechanism.
6948 Note that due to a peculiarity of the way BSD \c{a.out} format
6949 handles this relocation type, there must be at least one non-local
6950 symbol in the same section as the address you're trying to access.
6953 \S{picextern} Finding External and Common Data Items
6955 If your library needs to get at an external variable (external to
6956 the \e{library}, not just to one of the modules within it), you must
6957 use the \I{GOT relocations}\I\c{WRT ..got}\c{..got} type to get at
6958 it. The \c{..got} type, instead of giving you the offset from the
6959 GOT base to the variable, gives you the offset from the GOT base to
6960 a GOT \e{entry} containing the address of the variable. The linker
6961 will set up this GOT entry when it builds the library, and the
6962 dynamic linker will place the correct address in it at load time. So
6963 to obtain the address of an external variable \c{extvar} in \c{EAX},
6966 \c mov eax,[ebx+extvar wrt ..got]
6968 This loads the address of \c{extvar} out of an entry in the GOT. The
6969 linker, when it builds the shared library, collects together every
6970 relocation of type \c{..got}, and builds the GOT so as to ensure it
6971 has every necessary entry present.
6973 Common variables must also be accessed in this way.
6976 \S{picglobal} Exporting Symbols to the Library User
6978 If you want to export symbols to the user of the library, you have
6979 to declare whether they are functions or data, and if they are data,
6980 you have to give the size of the data item. This is because the
6981 dynamic linker has to build \I{PLT}\i{procedure linkage table}
6982 entries for any exported functions, and also moves exported data
6983 items away from the library's data section in which they were
6986 So to export a function to users of the library, you must use
6988 \c global func:function ; declare it as a function
6994 And to export a data item such as an array, you would have to code
6996 \c global array:data array.end-array ; give the size too
7001 Be careful: If you export a variable to the library user, by
7002 declaring it as \c{GLOBAL} and supplying a size, the variable will
7003 end up living in the data section of the main program, rather than
7004 in your library's data section, where you declared it. So you will
7005 have to access your own global variable with the \c{..got} mechanism
7006 rather than \c{..gotoff}, as if it were external (which,
7007 effectively, it has become).
7009 Equally, if you need to store the address of an exported global in
7010 one of your data sections, you can't do it by means of the standard
7013 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item ; WRONG
7015 NASM will interpret this code as an ordinary relocation, in which
7016 \c{global_data_item} is merely an offset from the beginning of the
7017 \c{.data} section (or whatever); so this reference will end up
7018 pointing at your data section instead of at the exported global
7019 which resides elsewhere.
7021 Instead of the above code, then, you must write
7023 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item wrt ..sym
7025 which makes use of the special \c{WRT} type \I\c{WRT ..sym}\c{..sym}
7026 to instruct NASM to search the symbol table for a particular symbol
7027 at that address, rather than just relocating by section base.
7029 Either method will work for functions: referring to one of your
7030 functions by means of
7032 \c funcptr: dd my_function
7034 will give the user the address of the code you wrote, whereas
7036 \c funcptr: dd my_function wrt .sym
7038 will give the address of the procedure linkage table for the
7039 function, which is where the calling program will \e{believe} the
7040 function lives. Either address is a valid way to call the function.
7043 \S{picproc} Calling Procedures Outside the Library
7045 Calling procedures outside your shared library has to be done by
7046 means of a \i\e{procedure linkage table}, or \i{PLT}. The PLT is
7047 placed at a known offset from where the library is loaded, so the
7048 library code can make calls to the PLT in a position-independent
7049 way. Within the PLT there is code to jump to offsets contained in
7050 the GOT, so function calls to other shared libraries or to routines
7051 in the main program can be transparently passed off to their real
7054 To call an external routine, you must use another special PIC
7055 relocation type, \I{PLT relocations}\i\c{WRT ..plt}. This is much
7056 easier than the GOT-based ones: you simply replace calls such as
7057 \c{CALL printf} with the PLT-relative version \c{CALL printf WRT
7061 \S{link} Generating the Library File
7063 Having written some code modules and assembled them to \c{.o} files,
7064 you then generate your shared library with a command such as
7066 \c ld -shared -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for ELF
7067 \c ld -Bshareable -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for BSD
7069 For ELF, if your shared library is going to reside in system
7070 directories such as \c{/usr/lib} or \c{/lib}, it is usually worth
7071 using the \i\c{-soname} flag to the linker, to store the final
7072 library file name, with a version number, into the library:
7074 \c ld -shared -soname library.so.1 -o library.so.1.2 *.o
7076 You would then copy \c{library.so.1.2} into the library directory,
7077 and create \c{library.so.1} as a symbolic link to it.
7080 \C{mixsize} Mixing 16 and 32 Bit Code
7082 This chapter tries to cover some of the issues, largely related to
7083 unusual forms of addressing and jump instructions, encountered when
7084 writing operating system code such as protected-mode initialisation
7085 routines, which require code that operates in mixed segment sizes,
7086 such as code in a 16-bit segment trying to modify data in a 32-bit
7087 one, or jumps between different-size segments.
7090 \H{mixjump} Mixed-Size Jumps\I{jumps, mixed-size}
7092 \I{operating system, writing}\I{writing operating systems}The most
7093 common form of \i{mixed-size instruction} is the one used when
7094 writing a 32-bit OS: having done your setup in 16-bit mode, such as
7095 loading the kernel, you then have to boot it by switching into
7096 protected mode and jumping to the 32-bit kernel start address. In a
7097 fully 32-bit OS, this tends to be the \e{only} mixed-size
7098 instruction you need, since everything before it can be done in pure
7099 16-bit code, and everything after it can be pure 32-bit.
7101 This jump must specify a 48-bit far address, since the target
7102 segment is a 32-bit one. However, it must be assembled in a 16-bit
7103 segment, so just coding, for example,
7105 \c jmp 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; wrong!
7107 will not work, since the offset part of the address will be
7108 truncated to \c{0x9ABC} and the jump will be an ordinary 16-bit far
7111 The Linux kernel setup code gets round the inability of \c{as86} to
7112 generate the required instruction by coding it manually, using
7113 \c{DB} instructions. NASM can go one better than that, by actually
7114 generating the right instruction itself. Here's how to do it right:
7116 \c jmp dword 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; right
7118 \I\c{JMP DWORD}The \c{DWORD} prefix (strictly speaking, it should
7119 come \e{after} the colon, since it is declaring the \e{offset} field
7120 to be a doubleword; but NASM will accept either form, since both are
7121 unambiguous) forces the offset part to be treated as far, in the
7122 assumption that you are deliberately writing a jump from a 16-bit
7123 segment to a 32-bit one.
7125 You can do the reverse operation, jumping from a 32-bit segment to a
7126 16-bit one, by means of the \c{WORD} prefix:
7128 \c jmp word 0x8765:0x4321 ; 32 to 16 bit
7130 If the \c{WORD} prefix is specified in 16-bit mode, or the \c{DWORD}
7131 prefix in 32-bit mode, they will be ignored, since each is
7132 explicitly forcing NASM into a mode it was in anyway.
7135 \H{mixaddr} Addressing Between Different-Size Segments\I{addressing,
7136 mixed-size}\I{mixed-size addressing}
7138 If your OS is mixed 16 and 32-bit, or if you are writing a DOS
7139 extender, you are likely to have to deal with some 16-bit segments
7140 and some 32-bit ones. At some point, you will probably end up
7141 writing code in a 16-bit segment which has to access data in a
7142 32-bit segment, or vice versa.
7144 If the data you are trying to access in a 32-bit segment lies within
7145 the first 64K of the segment, you may be able to get away with using
7146 an ordinary 16-bit addressing operation for the purpose; but sooner
7147 or later, you will want to do 32-bit addressing from 16-bit mode.
7149 The easiest way to do this is to make sure you use a register for
7150 the address, since any effective address containing a 32-bit
7151 register is forced to be a 32-bit address. So you can do
7153 \c mov eax,offset_into_32_bit_segment_specified_by_fs
7154 \c mov dword [fs:eax],0x11223344
7156 This is fine, but slightly cumbersome (since it wastes an
7157 instruction and a register) if you already know the precise offset
7158 you are aiming at. The x86 architecture does allow 32-bit effective
7159 addresses to specify nothing but a 4-byte offset, so why shouldn't
7160 NASM be able to generate the best instruction for the purpose?
7162 It can. As in \k{mixjump}, you need only prefix the address with the
7163 \c{DWORD} keyword, and it will be forced to be a 32-bit address:
7165 \c mov dword [fs:dword my_offset],0x11223344
7167 Also as in \k{mixjump}, NASM is not fussy about whether the
7168 \c{DWORD} prefix comes before or after the segment override, so
7169 arguably a nicer-looking way to code the above instruction is
7171 \c mov dword [dword fs:my_offset],0x11223344
7173 Don't confuse the \c{DWORD} prefix \e{outside} the square brackets,
7174 which controls the size of the data stored at the address, with the
7175 one \c{inside} the square brackets which controls the length of the
7176 address itself. The two can quite easily be different:
7178 \c mov word [dword 0x12345678],0x9ABC
7180 This moves 16 bits of data to an address specified by a 32-bit
7183 You can also specify \c{WORD} or \c{DWORD} prefixes along with the
7184 \c{FAR} prefix to indirect far jumps or calls. For example:
7186 \c call dword far [fs:word 0x4321]
7188 This instruction contains an address specified by a 16-bit offset;
7189 it loads a 48-bit far pointer from that (16-bit segment and 32-bit
7190 offset), and calls that address.
7193 \H{mixother} Other Mixed-Size Instructions
7195 The other way you might want to access data might be using the
7196 string instructions (\c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx} and so on) or the
7197 \c{XLATB} instruction. These instructions, since they take no
7198 parameters, might seem to have no easy way to make them perform
7199 32-bit addressing when assembled in a 16-bit segment.
7201 This is the purpose of NASM's \i\c{a16}, \i\c{a32} and \i\c{a64} prefixes. If
7202 you are coding \c{LODSB} in a 16-bit segment but it is supposed to
7203 be accessing a string in a 32-bit segment, you should load the
7204 desired address into \c{ESI} and then code
7208 The prefix forces the addressing size to 32 bits, meaning that
7209 \c{LODSB} loads from \c{[DS:ESI]} instead of \c{[DS:SI]}. To access
7210 a string in a 16-bit segment when coding in a 32-bit one, the
7211 corresponding \c{a16} prefix can be used.
7213 The \c{a16}, \c{a32} and \c{a64} prefixes can be applied to any instruction
7214 in NASM's instruction table, but most of them can generate all the
7215 useful forms without them. The prefixes are necessary only for
7216 instructions with implicit addressing:
7217 \# \c{CMPSx} (\k{insCMPSB}),
7218 \# \c{SCASx} (\k{insSCASB}), \c{LODSx} (\k{insLODSB}), \c{STOSx}
7219 \# (\k{insSTOSB}), \c{MOVSx} (\k{insMOVSB}), \c{INSx} (\k{insINSB}),
7220 \# \c{OUTSx} (\k{insOUTSB}), and \c{XLATB} (\k{insXLATB}).
7221 \c{CMPSx}, \c{SCASx}, \c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx}, \c{MOVSx}, \c{INSx},
7222 \c{OUTSx}, and \c{XLATB}.
7224 various push and pop instructions (\c{PUSHA} and \c{POPF} as well as
7225 the more usual \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}) can accept \c{a16}, \c{a32} or \c{a64}
7226 prefixes to force a particular one of \c{SP}, \c{ESP} or \c{RSP} to be used
7227 as a stack pointer, in case the stack segment in use is a different
7228 size from the code segment.
7230 \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}, when applied to segment registers in 32-bit
7231 mode, also have the slightly odd behaviour that they push and pop 4
7232 bytes at a time, of which the top two are ignored and the bottom two
7233 give the value of the segment register being manipulated. To force
7234 the 16-bit behaviour of segment-register push and pop instructions,
7235 you can use the operand-size prefix \i\c{o16}:
7240 This code saves a doubleword of stack space by fitting two segment
7241 registers into the space which would normally be consumed by pushing
7244 (You can also use the \i\c{o32} prefix to force the 32-bit behaviour
7245 when in 16-bit mode, but this seems less useful.)
7248 \C{64bit} Writing 64-bit Code (Unix, Win64)
7250 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved when
7251 writing 64-bit code, to run under \i{Win64} or Unix. It covers how to
7252 write assembly code to interface with 64-bit C routines, and how to
7253 write position-independent code for shared libraries.
7255 All 64-bit code uses a flat memory model, since segmentation is not
7256 available in 64-bit mode. The one exception is the \c{FS} and \c{GS}
7257 registers, which still add their bases.
7259 Position independence in 64-bit mode is significantly simpler, since
7260 the processor supports \c{RIP}-relative addressing directly; see the
7261 \c{REL} keyword (\k{effaddr}). On most 64-bit platforms, it is
7262 probably desirable to make that the default, using the directive
7263 \c{DEFAULT REL} (\k{default}).
7265 64-bit programming is relatively similar to 32-bit programming, but
7266 of course pointers are 64 bits long; additionally, all existing
7267 platforms pass arguments in registers rather than on the stack.
7268 Furthermore, 64-bit platforms use SSE2 by default for floating point.
7269 Please see the ABI documentation for your platform.
7271 64-bit platforms differ in the sizes of the fundamental datatypes, not
7272 just from 32-bit platforms but from each other. If a specific size
7273 data type is desired, it is probably best to use the types defined in
7274 the Standard C header \c{<inttypes.h>}.
7276 In 64-bit mode, the default instruction size is still 32 bits. When
7277 loading a value into a 32-bit register (but not an 8- or 16-bit
7278 register), the upper 32 bits of the corresponding 64-bit register are
7281 \H{reg64} Register Names in 64-bit Mode
7283 NASM uses the following names for general-purpose registers in 64-bit
7284 mode, for 8-, 16-, 32- and 64-bit references, respecitively:
7286 \c AL/AH, CL/CH, DL/DH, BL/BH, SPL, BPL, SIL, DIL, R8B-R15B
7287 \c AX, CX, DX, BX, SP, BP, SI, DI, R8W-R15W
7288 \c EAX, ECX, EDX, EBX, ESP, EBP, ESI, EDI, R8D-R15D
7289 \c RAX, RCX, RDX, RBX, RSP, RBP, RSI, RDI, R8-R15
7291 This is consistent with the AMD documentation and most other
7292 assemblers. The Intel documentation, however, uses the names
7293 \c{R8L-R15L} for 8-bit references to the higher registers. It is
7294 possible to use those names by definiting them as macros; similarly,
7295 if one wants to use numeric names for the low 8 registers, define them
7296 as macros. The standard macro package \c{altreg} (see \k{pkg_altreg})
7297 can be used for this purpose.
7299 \H{id64} Immediates and Displacements in 64-bit Mode
7301 In 64-bit mode, immediates and displacements are generally only 32
7302 bits wide. NASM will therefore truncate most displacements and
7303 immediates to 32 bits.
7305 The only instruction which takes a full \i{64-bit immediate} is:
7309 NASM will produce this instruction whenever the programmer uses
7310 \c{MOV} with an immediate into a 64-bit register. If this is not
7311 desirable, simply specify the equivalent 32-bit register, which will
7312 be automatically zero-extended by the processor, or specify the
7313 immediate as \c{DWORD}:
7315 \c mov rax,foo ; 64-bit immediate
7316 \c mov rax,qword foo ; (identical)
7317 \c mov eax,foo ; 32-bit immediate, zero-extended
7318 \c mov rax,dword foo ; 32-bit immediate, sign-extended
7320 The length of these instructions are 10, 5 and 7 bytes, respectively.
7322 The only instructions which take a full \I{64-bit displacement}64-bit
7323 \e{displacement} is loading or storing, using \c{MOV}, \c{AL}, \c{AX},
7324 \c{EAX} or \c{RAX} (but no other registers) to an absolute 64-bit address.
7325 Since this is a relatively rarely used instruction (64-bit code generally uses
7326 relative addressing), the programmer has to explicitly declare the
7327 displacement size as \c{QWORD}:
7331 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, sign-extended
7332 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, zero-extended
7333 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7337 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit relative disp
7338 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; d:o, address truncated to 32 bits(!)
7339 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; error
7340 \c mov eax,[abs qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7342 A sign-extended absolute displacement can access from -2 GB to +2 GB;
7343 a zero-extended absolute displacement can access from 0 to 4 GB.
7345 \H{unix64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Unix)
7347 On Unix, the 64-bit ABI is defined by the document:
7349 \W{http://www.x86-64.org/documentation/abi.pdf}\c{http://www.x86-64.org/documentation/abi.pdf}
7351 Although written for AT&T-syntax assembly, the concepts apply equally
7352 well for NASM-style assembly. What follows is a simplified summary.
7354 The first six integer arguments (from the left) are passed in \c{RDI},
7355 \c{RSI}, \c{RDX}, \c{RCX}, \c{R8}, and \c{R9}, in that order.
7356 Additional integer arguments are passed on the stack. These
7357 registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and \c{R11} are destroyed by function
7358 calls, and thus are available for use by the function without saving.
7360 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} and \c{RDX}, in that order.
7362 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7363 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM7};
7364 return is \c{XMM0} and \c{XMM1}. \c{long double} are passed on the
7365 stack, and returned in \c{ST0} and \c{ST1}.
7367 All SSE and x87 registers are destroyed by function calls.
7369 On 64-bit Unix, \c{long} is 64 bits.
7371 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted separately, so for the case of
7373 \c void foo(long a, double b, int c)
7375 \c{a} is passed in \c{RDI}, \c{b} in \c{XMM0}, and \c{c} in \c{ESI}.
7377 \H{win64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Win64)
7379 The Win64 ABI is described at:
7381 \W{http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-gb/library/ms794533.aspx}\c{http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-gb/library/ms794533.aspx}
7383 What follows is a simplified summary.
7385 The first four integer arguments are passed in \c{RCX}, \c{RDX},
7386 \c{R8} and \c{R9}, in that order. Additional integer arguments are
7387 passed on the stack. These registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and
7388 \c{R11} are destroyed by function calls, and thus are available for
7389 use by the function without saving.
7391 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} only.
7393 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7394 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM3};
7395 return is \c{XMM0} only.
7397 On Win64, \c{long} is 32 bits; \c{long long} or \c{_int64} is 64 bits.
7399 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted together, so for the case of
7401 \c void foo(long long a, double b, int c)
7403 \c{a} is passed in \c{RCX}, \c{b} in \c{XMM1}, and \c{c} in \c{R8D}.
7405 \C{trouble} Troubleshooting
7407 This chapter describes some of the common problems that users have
7408 been known to encounter with NASM, and answers them. It also gives
7409 instructions for reporting bugs in NASM if you find a difficulty
7410 that isn't listed here.
7413 \H{problems} Common Problems
7415 \S{inefficient} NASM Generates \i{Inefficient Code}
7417 We sometimes get `bug' reports about NASM generating inefficient, or
7418 even `wrong', code on instructions such as \c{ADD ESP,8}. This is a
7419 deliberate design feature, connected to predictability of output:
7420 NASM, on seeing \c{ADD ESP,8}, will generate the form of the
7421 instruction which leaves room for a 32-bit offset. You need to code
7422 \I\c{BYTE}\c{ADD ESP,BYTE 8} if you want the space-efficient form of
7423 the instruction. This isn't a bug, it's user error: if you prefer to
7424 have NASM produce the more efficient code automatically enable
7425 optimization with the \c{-O} option (see \k{opt-O}).
7428 \S{jmprange} My Jumps are Out of Range\I{out of range, jumps}
7430 Similarly, people complain that when they issue \i{conditional
7431 jumps} (which are \c{SHORT} by default) that try to jump too far,
7432 NASM reports `short jump out of range' instead of making the jumps
7435 This, again, is partly a predictability issue, but in fact has a
7436 more practical reason as well. NASM has no means of being told what
7437 type of processor the code it is generating will be run on; so it
7438 cannot decide for itself that it should generate \i\c{Jcc NEAR} type
7439 instructions, because it doesn't know that it's working for a 386 or
7440 above. Alternatively, it could replace the out-of-range short
7441 \c{JNE} instruction with a very short \c{JE} instruction that jumps
7442 over a \c{JMP NEAR}; this is a sensible solution for processors
7443 below a 386, but hardly efficient on processors which have good
7444 branch prediction \e{and} could have used \c{JNE NEAR} instead. So,
7445 once again, it's up to the user, not the assembler, to decide what
7446 instructions should be generated. See \k{opt-O}.
7449 \S{proborg} \i\c{ORG} Doesn't Work
7451 People writing \i{boot sector} programs in the \c{bin} format often
7452 complain that \c{ORG} doesn't work the way they'd like: in order to
7453 place the \c{0xAA55} signature word at the end of a 512-byte boot
7454 sector, people who are used to MASM tend to code
7458 \c ; some boot sector code
7463 This is not the intended use of the \c{ORG} directive in NASM, and
7464 will not work. The correct way to solve this problem in NASM is to
7465 use the \i\c{TIMES} directive, like this:
7469 \c ; some boot sector code
7471 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7474 The \c{TIMES} directive will insert exactly enough zero bytes into
7475 the output to move the assembly point up to 510. This method also
7476 has the advantage that if you accidentally fill your boot sector too
7477 full, NASM will catch the problem at assembly time and report it, so
7478 you won't end up with a boot sector that you have to disassemble to
7479 find out what's wrong with it.
7482 \S{probtimes} \i\c{TIMES} Doesn't Work
7484 The other common problem with the above code is people who write the
7489 by reasoning that \c{$} should be a pure number, just like 510, so
7490 the difference between them is also a pure number and can happily be
7493 NASM is a \e{modular} assembler: the various component parts are
7494 designed to be easily separable for re-use, so they don't exchange
7495 information unnecessarily. In consequence, the \c{bin} output
7496 format, even though it has been told by the \c{ORG} directive that
7497 the \c{.text} section should start at 0, does not pass that
7498 information back to the expression evaluator. So from the
7499 evaluator's point of view, \c{$} isn't a pure number: it's an offset
7500 from a section base. Therefore the difference between \c{$} and 510
7501 is also not a pure number, but involves a section base. Values
7502 involving section bases cannot be passed as arguments to \c{TIMES}.
7504 The solution, as in the previous section, is to code the \c{TIMES}
7507 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7509 in which \c{$} and \c{$$} are offsets from the same section base,
7510 and so their difference is a pure number. This will solve the
7511 problem and generate sensible code.
7514 \H{bugs} \i{Bugs}\I{reporting bugs}
7516 We have never yet released a version of NASM with any \e{known}
7517 bugs. That doesn't usually stop there being plenty we didn't know
7518 about, though. Any that you find should be reported firstly via the
7520 \W{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}\c{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}
7521 (click on "Bugs"), or if that fails then through one of the
7522 contacts in \k{contact}.
7524 Please read \k{qstart} first, and don't report the bug if it's
7525 listed in there as a deliberate feature. (If you think the feature
7526 is badly thought out, feel free to send us reasons why you think it
7527 should be changed, but don't just send us mail saying `This is a
7528 bug' if the documentation says we did it on purpose.) Then read
7529 \k{problems}, and don't bother reporting the bug if it's listed
7532 If you do report a bug, \e{please} give us all of the following
7535 \b What operating system you're running NASM under. DOS, Linux,
7536 NetBSD, Win16, Win32, VMS (I'd be impressed), whatever.
7538 \b If you're running NASM under DOS or Win32, tell us whether you've
7539 compiled your own executable from the DOS source archive, or whether
7540 you were using the standard distribution binaries out of the
7541 archive. If you were using a locally built executable, try to
7542 reproduce the problem using one of the standard binaries, as this
7543 will make it easier for us to reproduce your problem prior to fixing
7546 \b Which version of NASM you're using, and exactly how you invoked
7547 it. Give us the precise command line, and the contents of the
7548 \c{NASMENV} environment variable if any.
7550 \b Which versions of any supplementary programs you're using, and
7551 how you invoked them. If the problem only becomes visible at link
7552 time, tell us what linker you're using, what version of it you've
7553 got, and the exact linker command line. If the problem involves
7554 linking against object files generated by a compiler, tell us what
7555 compiler, what version, and what command line or options you used.
7556 (If you're compiling in an IDE, please try to reproduce the problem
7557 with the command-line version of the compiler.)
7559 \b If at all possible, send us a NASM source file which exhibits the
7560 problem. If this causes copyright problems (e.g. you can only
7561 reproduce the bug in restricted-distribution code) then bear in mind
7562 the following two points: firstly, we guarantee that any source code
7563 sent to us for the purposes of debugging NASM will be used \e{only}
7564 for the purposes of debugging NASM, and that we will delete all our
7565 copies of it as soon as we have found and fixed the bug or bugs in
7566 question; and secondly, we would prefer \e{not} to be mailed large
7567 chunks of code anyway. The smaller the file, the better. A
7568 three-line sample file that does nothing useful \e{except}
7569 demonstrate the problem is much easier to work with than a
7570 fully fledged ten-thousand-line program. (Of course, some errors
7571 \e{do} only crop up in large files, so this may not be possible.)
7573 \b A description of what the problem actually \e{is}. `It doesn't
7574 work' is \e{not} a helpful description! Please describe exactly what
7575 is happening that shouldn't be, or what isn't happening that should.
7576 Examples might be: `NASM generates an error message saying Line 3
7577 for an error that's actually on Line 5'; `NASM generates an error
7578 message that I believe it shouldn't be generating at all'; `NASM
7579 fails to generate an error message that I believe it \e{should} be
7580 generating'; `the object file produced from this source code crashes
7581 my linker'; `the ninth byte of the output file is 66 and I think it
7582 should be 77 instead'.
7584 \b If you believe the output file from NASM to be faulty, send it to
7585 us. That allows us to determine whether our own copy of NASM
7586 generates the same file, or whether the problem is related to
7587 portability issues between our development platforms and yours. We
7588 can handle binary files mailed to us as MIME attachments, uuencoded,
7589 and even BinHex. Alternatively, we may be able to provide an FTP
7590 site you can upload the suspect files to; but mailing them is easier
7593 \b Any other information or data files that might be helpful. If,
7594 for example, the problem involves NASM failing to generate an object
7595 file while TASM can generate an equivalent file without trouble,
7596 then send us \e{both} object files, so we can see what TASM is doing
7597 differently from us.
7600 \A{ndisasm} \i{Ndisasm}
7602 The Netwide Disassembler, NDISASM
7604 \H{ndisintro} Introduction
7607 The Netwide Disassembler is a small companion program to the Netwide
7608 Assembler, NASM. It seemed a shame to have an x86 assembler,
7609 complete with a full instruction table, and not make as much use of
7610 it as possible, so here's a disassembler which shares the
7611 instruction table (and some other bits of code) with NASM.
7613 The Netwide Disassembler does nothing except to produce
7614 disassemblies of \e{binary} source files. NDISASM does not have any
7615 understanding of object file formats, like \c{objdump}, and it will
7616 not understand \c{DOS .EXE} files like \c{debug} will. It just
7620 \H{ndisstart} Getting Started: Installation
7622 See \k{install} for installation instructions. NDISASM, like NASM,
7623 has a \c{man page} which you may want to put somewhere useful, if you
7624 are on a Unix system.
7627 \H{ndisrun} Running NDISASM
7629 To disassemble a file, you will typically use a command of the form
7631 \c ndisasm -b {16|32|64} filename
7633 NDISASM can disassemble 16-, 32- or 64-bit code equally easily,
7634 provided of course that you remember to specify which it is to work
7635 with. If no \i\c{-b} switch is present, NDISASM works in 16-bit mode
7636 by default. The \i\c{-u} switch (for USE32) also invokes 32-bit mode.
7638 Two more command line options are \i\c{-r} which reports the version
7639 number of NDISASM you are running, and \i\c{-h} which gives a short
7640 summary of command line options.
7643 \S{ndiscom} COM Files: Specifying an Origin
7645 To disassemble a \c{DOS .COM} file correctly, a disassembler must assume
7646 that the first instruction in the file is loaded at address \c{0x100},
7647 rather than at zero. NDISASM, which assumes by default that any file
7648 you give it is loaded at zero, will therefore need to be informed of
7651 The \i\c{-o} option allows you to declare a different origin for the
7652 file you are disassembling. Its argument may be expressed in any of
7653 the NASM numeric formats: decimal by default, if it begins with `\c{$}'
7654 or `\c{0x}' or ends in `\c{H}' it's \c{hex}, if it ends in `\c{Q}' it's
7655 \c{octal}, and if it ends in `\c{B}' it's \c{binary}.
7657 Hence, to disassemble a \c{.COM} file:
7659 \c ndisasm -o100h filename.com
7664 \S{ndissync} Code Following Data: Synchronisation
7666 Suppose you are disassembling a file which contains some data which
7667 isn't machine code, and \e{then} contains some machine code. NDISASM
7668 will faithfully plough through the data section, producing machine
7669 instructions wherever it can (although most of them will look
7670 bizarre, and some may have unusual prefixes, e.g. `\c{FS OR AX,0x240A}'),
7671 and generating `DB' instructions ever so often if it's totally stumped.
7672 Then it will reach the code section.
7674 Supposing NDISASM has just finished generating a strange machine
7675 instruction from part of the data section, and its file position is
7676 now one byte \e{before} the beginning of the code section. It's
7677 entirely possible that another spurious instruction will get
7678 generated, starting with the final byte of the data section, and
7679 then the correct first instruction in the code section will not be
7680 seen because the starting point skipped over it. This isn't really
7683 To avoid this, you can specify a `\i\c{synchronisation}' point, or indeed
7684 as many synchronisation points as you like (although NDISASM can
7685 only handle 8192 sync points internally). The definition of a sync
7686 point is this: NDISASM guarantees to hit sync points exactly during
7687 disassembly. If it is thinking about generating an instruction which
7688 would cause it to jump over a sync point, it will discard that
7689 instruction and output a `\c{db}' instead. So it \e{will} start
7690 disassembly exactly from the sync point, and so you \e{will} see all
7691 the instructions in your code section.
7693 Sync points are specified using the \i\c{-s} option: they are measured
7694 in terms of the program origin, not the file position. So if you
7695 want to synchronize after 32 bytes of a \c{.COM} file, you would have to
7698 \c ndisasm -o100h -s120h file.com
7702 \c ndisasm -o100h -s20h file.com
7704 As stated above, you can specify multiple sync markers if you need
7705 to, just by repeating the \c{-s} option.
7708 \S{ndisisync} Mixed Code and Data: Automatic (Intelligent) Synchronisation
7711 Suppose you are disassembling the boot sector of a \c{DOS} floppy (maybe
7712 it has a virus, and you need to understand the virus so that you
7713 know what kinds of damage it might have done you). Typically, this
7714 will contain a \c{JMP} instruction, then some data, then the rest of the
7715 code. So there is a very good chance of NDISASM being \e{misaligned}
7716 when the data ends and the code begins. Hence a sync point is
7719 On the other hand, why should you have to specify the sync point
7720 manually? What you'd do in order to find where the sync point would
7721 be, surely, would be to read the \c{JMP} instruction, and then to use
7722 its target address as a sync point. So can NDISASM do that for you?
7724 The answer, of course, is yes: using either of the synonymous
7725 switches \i\c{-a} (for automatic sync) or \i\c{-i} (for intelligent
7726 sync) will enable \c{auto-sync} mode. Auto-sync mode automatically
7727 generates a sync point for any forward-referring PC-relative jump or
7728 call instruction that NDISASM encounters. (Since NDISASM is one-pass,
7729 if it encounters a PC-relative jump whose target has already been
7730 processed, there isn't much it can do about it...)
7732 Only PC-relative jumps are processed, since an absolute jump is
7733 either through a register (in which case NDISASM doesn't know what
7734 the register contains) or involves a segment address (in which case
7735 the target code isn't in the same segment that NDISASM is working
7736 in, and so the sync point can't be placed anywhere useful).
7738 For some kinds of file, this mechanism will automatically put sync
7739 points in all the right places, and save you from having to place
7740 any sync points manually. However, it should be stressed that
7741 auto-sync mode is \e{not} guaranteed to catch all the sync points, and
7742 you may still have to place some manually.
7744 Auto-sync mode doesn't prevent you from declaring manual sync
7745 points: it just adds automatically generated ones to the ones you
7746 provide. It's perfectly feasible to specify \c{-i} \e{and} some \c{-s}
7749 Another caveat with auto-sync mode is that if, by some unpleasant
7750 fluke, something in your data section should disassemble to a
7751 PC-relative call or jump instruction, NDISASM may obediently place a
7752 sync point in a totally random place, for example in the middle of
7753 one of the instructions in your code section. So you may end up with
7754 a wrong disassembly even if you use auto-sync. Again, there isn't
7755 much I can do about this. If you have problems, you'll have to use
7756 manual sync points, or use the \c{-k} option (documented below) to
7757 suppress disassembly of the data area.
7760 \S{ndisother} Other Options
7762 The \i\c{-e} option skips a header on the file, by ignoring the first N
7763 bytes. This means that the header is \e{not} counted towards the
7764 disassembly offset: if you give \c{-e10 -o10}, disassembly will start
7765 at byte 10 in the file, and this will be given offset 10, not 20.
7767 The \i\c{-k} option is provided with two comma-separated numeric
7768 arguments, the first of which is an assembly offset and the second
7769 is a number of bytes to skip. This \e{will} count the skipped bytes
7770 towards the assembly offset: its use is to suppress disassembly of a
7771 data section which wouldn't contain anything you wanted to see
7775 \H{ndisbugs} Bugs and Improvements
7777 There are no known bugs. However, any you find, with patches if
7778 possible, should be sent to
7779 \W{mailto:nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}\c{nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}, or to the
7781 \W{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}\c{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}
7782 and we'll try to fix them. Feel free to send contributions and
7783 new features as well.
7785 \A{inslist} \i{Instruction List}
7787 \H{inslistintro} Introduction
7789 The following sections show the instructions which NASM currently supports. For each
7790 instruction, there is a separate entry for each supported addressing mode. The third
7791 column shows the processor type in which the instruction was introduced and,
7792 when appropriate, one or more usage flags.
7796 \A{changelog} \i{NASM Version History}